Operation Amp Maintenance Manual For fm200 System Rev 01 PDF Free

Operation & Maintenance
Manual QATAR FACTORY

For NAFFCO
FM200 System
Project:
7 Service Hubs at Manateq Logistic
Park & Special Economic
Zones
Client:
M/s. Manateq
Consultant:
M/s. Gulf Engineering & Industrial
Consultancy
MEP Contractor:
M/s. Al Muntasser Contracting & Trading
Co.
Doc. Ref. No.: QF-2020-QHSE-OMM-8705
01 12/03/2020 O&MManual GK NB
Checked & Approved
Rev Date Description Prepared by
by
For Fire fighting Equipment T. +974 4402 5888 F, +971444 For Complai nts 8 Queries emoil to:
Safety Systems - NAFFCO 114630 www. qotorfa ctory. qa info@q ato rfoctory.qa
slat
@
_ ±cu-I1»#±=all -»U»las-AN
eGius EwGnvssiwG s INousreiAt coisu~ivcY
ECONOMIC ZONES COMPANY (MANATEQ) ALMUNTASSER
PROJECTS DEPARTMENT CONTRACTING & TRADING
REVIEW COMMENTS SHEET (RCS)

Project: Construction of 7 Service Hubs at Manateq Logistic Parks
Contract No.: MNTO-CW03-CON-18:
Client: MNTQ- Manateq
Consultant: GEIC - Gulf Engineering & Industrial Consultancy
Contractor: AMCT • AI-Muntasser Contracting & Trading
RCS Reference No.: MNTQ-CW03-AMCT-MEC-OMM-000004 Revision 01 Date 2/16/2020
Submittal Title: Operation and Maintenance Manual -for FM 200 System
Submittal Ref. No.: MNTQ-CW03-AMCT-MEC-OMM-000004 Revision 01 Date 2/22/2020
Reviewed by: Yahya Naji Issued To: AMC
T
Documents reviewed herein, issued under referenced Submittal, are hereby returned to the issuer with thefollowing comments, assessment code and/or
requested actions.
uouuuooe!
A = No Comm ents/ Ap proved
Project Manager / Focal: B=.Pro ceed by Com plying to Com ments I Resubm it fo r Final Ap pro val
C = May not Proceed/ Revise and Resubm it fo r Review
ot Approved/
Assessment Code: Rejected ote
(issued by
PM)
Reviewer Submitter
Observations/ Comments
Identification of Open
Document / Drawing
Reviewer comment's source: Comments (if
No./Rev. any) Comment Assessment Code
[doc/part/page/para] Closed
The Manuals used operationally or frequently for operator/user

1 instruction, and manuals needed for maintenance and repair E Noted. INFO
(including test equipment documentation) shall be provided
instruction, and manuals needed for maintenance, replacement and Complied. Refer to attached manufacturer
2 repair C CLO OPEN
maintenance manual in section 12.5
3 Tools and test equipment shall be provided C Complied. Refer to section 6.6 SED OPEN
Provide copy of final material approval and all QCDD certifications Please refer to Material Submittal MNTQ-CW03•
CLO
SED
4
for the all installed parts C AMCT-MEC-MAS-000026 for material approval CLO OPEN
and all QCDD Certifications. SED
Complied. Refer to section 8.1 & 8.2 for Control

Provide control panel wiring diagram, troubleshooting code and
5 C panel wiring diagram and Troubleshooting CLO OPEN
signals, etc. SED
details.
Please note that volt free dry contacts

provisions are available in FECP control panel.
7
6 Provide wiring diagram for interface with fire alarm system C Interfacing with fire alarm system & Others (By CLO SED OPEN
Fire Alarm/Main Contractor Scope). Refer to
attached FECP schematic in section 5.2.
Please refer to attached shop drawing in section
Block and simplified schematic diagrams shall be provided as B
necessary to explain the theory of operation. 12.6 for schematic diagram and sequence of CLO SED OPEN
operation.
8
Separate step-by-step initial turn-on, normal operating, and B Complied. Please refer to section 5.3 CLO SED OPEN
emergency operating procedures.
MNTQ-PD-FRM-16 Rev.
Page 1/1
1.0 lssue Date:
MNTO-CWO3-AMCT-MEC-OMM-000004REV.01-
29/02/2016
3/12/2020(9.59 AM]
QRTRR
FRCTORY
7 SERVICE HUBS AT MANATEQ

LOGISTIC PARK & SPECIAL ECONOMIC
ZONES
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR
FM 200 SYSTEM
REV. No: 01
SECTIONS 1-13
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
NOTE PAGE
SECTION CHECKLIST:
Section 1 V HOW TO USE THE MANUAL

Section 2 V SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 3 V EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Section 4 V SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT
Section 5 V OPERATION
Section 6 V MAINTENANCE
Section 7 V DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS
Section 8 V TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 9 V MANUFACTURERS
Section 10 V GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
Section 11 V EMERGENCY INFORMATION
Section 12 V MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
Section 13 V COMMISSIONING DATA
2
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. HOW TO USE THE MANUAL 8
1.0 HOW TO USE THE MANUAL
9
1.1 OVERVIEW OF THE STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF THIS MANUAL 10
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 12
2.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 13
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13
2.2 STANDARD AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS 15
2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 15
2.3.1 Mechanical Part 15
2.3.2 Electrical Part 21
2.3.3 Warning and Instruction Signs, Illuminated Signs and Indicator Lamps .......25
3. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 26
3.0 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 27
3.1 FM 200 SYSTEM 27
4. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT 29
4.0 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT 30
4.1 SAFETY 30
4.2 FM 200 SYSTEM 30
4.3 HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION 31
4.4 ACCIDENT RELEASE MEASURES 32
4.5 MODIFICATION INFORMATION 32
4.6 SAFE OPERATIONAL AND CONTROL 32
4.6.1 Safety 32
4.6.2 Confined Space 33
4.6.3 Fall Protection 33
4.6.4 Special Hazards 33
4.6.5 Hazardous Materials 33
4.6.6 Electrical Safety 33
4.6.7 Isolation 33
5. OPERATION 34
5.0 OPERATION 35
3
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
5.1 FM 200 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

35
5.1.1 Automatic Detection and Release/ Sequence of Operation 35
5.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEM
37
5.3 STEP BY STEP OPERATION PROCEDURES
37
5.4 MODIFICATION INFORMATION
38
5.4.1 Storage Cylinders 38
5.4.2 Main and Reserved Cylinders 38
5.4.3 Fire Extinguishing Control Panel 38
5.4.4 Strobe 38
5.4.5 Horn 38
6. MAINTENANCE 39
6.0 MAINTENANCE
40
6.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
.40
6.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER OR OCCUPANT
.40
6.3 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR FM 200 SYSTEM
.41
6.3.1 Discharge Piping .41
6.3.2 Discharge Nozzle .41
6.3.3 Agent Storage Containers .41
6.3.4 Valve re-conditioning .42
6.3.5 Impulse Valve Operator .42
6.3.6 Container Test and lnspection .42
6.3.7 Maintenance Schedule for HFC 227ea Fire Detection System ...................43
6.3.8 Inspection 44
6.4 SMOKE DETECTOR MAINTENANCE
45
6.5 DEALING WITH HAZARDS WHICH MAY ARISE DURING
MAINTENANCE
46
6.5.1 Safe Process Flow Chart .46
6.6 SPECIAL TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND ANCILLARY SERVICES
47
6.6.1 Special Tools .47
6.6.2 Test Equipment .47
7. DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS 48
7.0 DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS 49
7.1 METHOD OF SAFE DISPOSAL 49
7.2 WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD 49
4
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
8. TROUBLESHOOTING 50
8.0 TROUBLESHOOTING 51
8.1 CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM 51
8.2 CHECKPOINTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR FM 200 SYSTEM .
51
9. MANUFACTURERS 55
9.0 MANUFACTURERS 56
10. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 57
10.0 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 58
10.1 CIRCUMSTANCES AND CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE VALIDITY
OF WARRANTY
58
10.2 GUARANTEE CERTIFICATES 58
11. EMERGENCY INFORMATION 59
11.0 EMERGENCY INFORMATION 60
11.1 GENERAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION 60
12. MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE 61
12.0 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE 62
13. COMMISSIONING DATA 69
13.0 COMMISSIONING DATA 70
13.1 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT 70
5
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.1 O&M Manual - Table of Contents 9

Table 3.1 FM 200 System Equipment Schedule 27
Table 4.1 HFC 227ea Concentration Exposure 31
Table 6.1 Special Tools 47
Table 6.2Test Equipment 47
Table 8.1 Checkpoints and Corrective Actions for FM 200 System ...
........................................................................................ 51
Table 9.1 Manufacturer's Information 56
Table 11.1 Emergency Information 60
Table12.1 List of Manufacturer's Literature 62
6
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2.1 FM 200 Cylinder Assembly 16

Figure 2.2 System Components 16
Figure 2.3 Container Brackets 17
Figure 2.4 Disk Pack 17
Figure 2.5 IVO (Left) and IRM (Right) 18
Figure 2.6 Electric Actuation - Multi Container System with IVO
18
Figure 2. 7 FM 200 Cylinder Pressure (L) and Liquid Level Indicator
(R) 19
Figure 2.8 Typical Installation Detail of Liquid Level lndicator
20
Figure 2.9 Discharge Pressure Switch 20
Figure 2.10 Engineered Discharge Nozzle 21
Figure 2.11 SHP PRO Extinguishing Control Panel 22
Figure 2.12 Manual Release Switch 22
Figure 2.13 System Abort Switch 23
Figure 2.14 Motor Alarm Bell 24
Figure 2.15 Horn Strobe 24
Figure 2.16 CRM4 Relay Module 25
Figure 6.1 Safe Process Flow Chart 46
7
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
1. HOW TO USE THE MANUAL
8
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
1.0 HOW TO USE THE MANUAL
This Operation and Maintenance Manual is prepared for seven service hubs
Project. This Manual is divided into the following sections:
Table 1.1 O&M Manual - Table of Contents

Sub-Section Heading
01 How to Use the Manual
02 System Description
03 Equipment Schedule
04 Safety And Environment
05 Operation
06 Maintenance
07 Disposal Instructions
08 Trouble Shooting
09 Manufacturers
10 Guarantees and Warrantees
11 Emergency Information
12 Manufacturer's Literature
13 Commissioning Data
9
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
1.1 OVERVIEW OF THE STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF THIS

MANUAL
A. This manual is consisted by independent section and this FM 200 System

is consisted of Thirteen (13) sections.
B. These parts are described here below:
Section 1 -- How to Use the Manual
This section provides details about the overall structure of the O&M Manuals,
about the manual format and how to use the manual, etc.
Section 2--System Description
This section provides a detailed idea about the system arrangement and also
functions and the general overview of the original design intent is indicated. Also
information about the system location, design criteria, expected service life and also
planned operation efficiencies are included in this section.
Section 3- Equipment Schedule
This section provides detailed list with all the installed equipment.
Section 4- Safety and Environment
This section provides safety precautionary measure before performing any

inspection, operation or maintenance task.
Section 5- Operation
This section provides full details for the startup procedures, normal operation
and emergency shutdown.
Section 6- Maintenance
Includes the basic maintenance aspects of the system and its

components organized in simple user-friendly schedules.
Section 7 - Disposal
Instruction
It describes all the potential hazards attributed in the operation of the system
and the proper disposal of waste materials produces during operation.
10
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Section 8- Trouble Shooting
This section describes the fault finding procedures. It is organized in tabulated

forms by presenting the problem, its possible cause and its solution. Their problems
and solution are arranged in logical way, whereby the most likely problems are
at the top of the form and the unlikely problems at the end. The content of this sub•
section is cross reference to the manufacturer's data provided the checkpoints and
corrective action.
Section 9- Manufacturers
This section provides details about each FM 200 System manufacturers with
complete contact details including address, telephone number, fax number and
email address. The same contact details are provided for local supplier and refilling
station.
Section 10-- Guarantee and Warranty
This section includes the guarantee and warranty for all equipment and devices
installed.
Section 11 -- Emergency Information
This section provides details about the emergency information and safety
precautionary measures.
Section 12 -- Manufacturer's Literature
This section accommodates the manufacturers documentation organized in a

logical way. In all manufacturers documentation, where needed, is added
explanatory notes to show the specific items and/or options used in the project.
Information that is not part of the project are either crossed out or stamped as "Not
Applicable". This process renders the manufacturers data as if it is especially
prepared for this project, rather than generic data
Section 13 -- Commissioning Data
This section includes the measured data, the measurement points, the test
equipment used, the calibration certificates details, test certificates and a statement
that the design requirements are achieved.
11
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FM 200 suppression system is a complete fire extinguishing system that utilizes

clean agent known as HFC-227ea (heptafluoropropane). Critical to the functioning
of the system is the fire detection and control network. Typical smoke detector
senses the presence of fire in a protected facility. The detection and control
panel then sounds an alarm, shutdown air handlers and then release agent
into the protected area.
The system consists of automatic fire detectors, manual release unit, abort station,
audible and visual alarm connected to release panel. Required quantity of
HFC-
227ea gas shall be stored in container. Signal from release panel actuates
control
head of HFC-227ea container, which releases required quantity of gas to the
hazard protected through a set of pipe work and nozzle. System is also provided
with a manual actuator to release the gas manually without involving control panel.
Fire detection system consists of release control panel, smoke detectors and alarm
annunciation. The panel is FIKE U.S.A makes model SHP PRO, UL listed for
extinguishing release operation. Panel is suitable for 220 VAC applications with
back battery for 24 hours' operation. Panel is with cross zoned method for gas
release signal.
Fire detection of the hazard protected is done with two detection zones each with
photoelectric smoke detectors. Detection of fire by any one zone shall have the
following sequence of operation.
• Illuminates alarm lamp on the control panel.

• Energize alarm bell inside hazard area
• Signal to main fire alarm panel
Detection of fire by both zones simultaneously is considered as fire condition

(cross-zoned) and panel enters to pre-discharge state. Following sequence of
operations starts.
• Illuminated pre-discharge LED on panel.

• Energized strobe horn inside protected area.
• Starts countdown of set time delay (30 seconds)
• Enable system abort sequence
• Signal to main fire alarm panel
• Shutdown motorized dampers
• Energizes warning light at the entrance of hazard.
13
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
At the end of 30 seconds time delay, panel energizes releaser circuit which
signals to Impulse Valve Operator (IVO). IVO actuates and releases gas. Also it
illuminates the released LED on the panel.
Provision is provided for manual release of gas through a manual release switch.
Actuation of manual release switch duplicates cross zoned detection condition
in the control panel. All functions mentioned above for the confirmed fire
condition occurs without any time delay.
Provision to hold release of gas in pre-discharge stage is provided through an

"abort switch". Abort switch is one of the types which required a constant pressure.
Release of gas will not happen till time the switch is kept hold. Function of this
switch is not available when manual release is operated.
To be effective, hazard protected should be made airtight before the discharge

of gas. Supply and return paths are close at pre-discharge state. Details of A/C
unit and motorized dampers are to be control to make each hazard air tight is
described in system operation and control for protected areas.
For each hazard, a required quantity of HFC 227ea gas as per minimum design
calculation is filled in an approved container. Containers are super pressurized
by dry nitrogen to 360PSI so that agents remained in liquid form inside the container.
Container is provided with pressure gauge.
FIKE's HFC 227ea containers utilize rupture disc in control head to release gas.
Rupture disc are operated by Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) by an electric signal
from releasing control panel. Gas is released to room through a pipe work and
nozzle arrangement. As per design standard, the maximum gas discharge time is
10 seconds. Pipe sizes and nozzle orifice sizes are selected by a UL listed
computerized flow calculation. Coverage of each nozzle and gas discharge by each
nozzle is considered to get minimum gas concentration at any point in the hazard
protected area.
Unnecessary exposure of personnel or either to the natural agent or to the products

of decomposition shall be avoided.
HFC 227-ea system is designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA 2001 as well as the limitation set forth by Underwriters
Laboratories.
14
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2.2 STANDARD AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
The complete systems are designed, furnished, erected and tested in

accordance with the latest applicable NFPA, FM, UL and local standard such as
Qatar Civil Defence Department and the National Standards where applicable.
2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

2.3.1 Mechanical Part
2.3.1.1 Agent Storage Container
The agent storage vessel consists of a container fitted with a valve assembly
which contains fast acting rupture disc, factory filled with HFC 227ea agent, and
super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to 25 bars @ 21 C (360 PSI @ 70F).
Containers sharing the same manifold shall be equal in size and fill density.
Containers are finished in durable, baked enamel finish and are available in
various sizes. A nameplate is adhered to the container displaying the agent
weight, tare weight, gross weight, fill density and charge date.
2.3.1.2 Container Nameplate
The container label details the weight of HFC 227ea contained, empty weight, fill
density and charge date. Once the label is applied to the container surface,
and to avoid possible tampering, it cannot be removed intact.
For each hazard required quantity of HFC 227ea gas as per minimum design
calculation is filled in an approved container. Containers are super
pressurized by dry nitrogen to 360 PSI, so that agents remain in liquid form in
container.
2.3.1.3 Valve Assembly
The valve assembly is factory-fitted to the container and is supplied pre•

assembled with a low pressure switch, pressure gauge and rupture disc. FIKE's
HFC 227ea containers utilize rupture disc in control head for release of gas.
Rupture disc are operated by Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) by an electric signal
from releasing control panel. Gas is released to room through a pipe work and
nozzle arrangement. As per design standard, the maximum gas discharge
time is 10 seconds.
15
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
/VO /RM
Pressure Vesse
Victaulic Coupling & Nipple
Pressure Gauge &

Removable Adapter
Figure 2.1 FM 200 Cylinder Assembly
« •
HORN
• - - ~ ,- - - - -~ - STROBE
e r
STRO BE
~ ,._~\
MANUAL RELEASE SWITCH .._.. '
@-.~
.. ti
•
DISCHARGE
NOZZLE
CONTROL PANEL DISCHARGE
STATUS INDICATOR PRESSURE
SWITCH
CONTROL. PANEL.
-
240 VAC
POWER
suPPL Y
Figure 2.2 system Components r
lddt
S
CYLINDER WITH
IVO
16
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2.3.1.4 Container Bracket
The bracket assembly consists of a nut and bolt, two bracket straps and one back
channel. To securely hold the container in position during the system discharge, two
bracket assemblies are required per container.
Each strap is notched for insertion into the back channel allowing the container
to be properly aligned. The bracket assembly is designed to be mounted to a
rigid vertical surface with the container assembly resting fully on the floor.
mi
Figure 2.3 Container Brackets
2.3.1.5 Disk Pack
A disc is factory fitted to every valve assembly. It is designed to rupture

when the container becomes over pressurized when subjected to temperatures
above the designed storage temperature.
Figure 2.4 Disk Pack
17
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2.3.1.6 Impulse Valve Operator and Impulse Release Module
A. Impulse valve operator provides the means to electrically or manually activate the
FIKE Impulse Valve clean agent containers. Upon activation, a pin is extended
with the force required to open the inverted rupture disc, allowing the agent to
release from the container.
B. Impulse Release Module provides the primary interface between the supervised
releasing circuit(s) of a FIKE fire suppression system and Impulse Valve
Operator (IVO) which is used to release the fire suppressant agent from an
impulse valve container.
Impulse Valve Operator Impulse Release Module
Figure 2.5 IVO (Left) and IRM (Right)
FIke Control Maximum of 6 IR!Ms can be wired to

I a single Fike Control Panel)
Panel
. ----;i, [--------------- ir-----------------i ,----- _L>

---gL" gT" g'T•
AM± (
W.± +>
.
Figure 2.6 Electric Actuation - Multi Container System with IVO
18
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
2.3.1.7 Low Pressure Switch and Liquid Level Indicator
A. A Low Pressure Supervisory Switch is fitted to every container and must be

utilized to safeguard the warranty requirements. The device continuously monitors
the container pressure and in the event of the pressure dropping below 24.8 bars
to 18.8 bars (360 psig to 288 psig) the switch operates to enable the condition
to be signaled to a control panel.
B. The Liquid Level Indicator is a simple manually operated device which provides a
means of verifying the weight of agent in a container without having to remove the
container and weigh it on a calibrated scale.
This device enables the inspector to determine the weight of agent with the
container safely secured in its installed position.
Figure 2.7 FM 200 Cylinder Pressure (L) and Liquid Level Indicator (R)
Cf ..-··-··--···
!
!
i
«d Lquld Level indicator [LLI]
·- - ---- - FIOa t ----- -
19
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Figure 2.8 Typical Installation Detail of Liquid Level Indicator
C. The Discharge Pressure Switch is used to provide a positive pneumatic

confirmation to the control system that the FIKE Fire Suppression system has
been discharged.
Violet (Common), Blue (N.O.), Black (N.C.)
18 Ga. 4ft. long leads, ends to be stripped
43/8 Approx.
Figure 2.9 Discharge Pressure Switch
2.3.1.8 Engineered Discharge Nozzle
HFC 227ea is distributed within the protected area by the discharge nozzle which is
sized to ensure the correct flow of agent for the risk. Nozzles are available with
seven or eight ports to allow for 180° or 360° horizontal discharge patterns.
Ports are drilled in 0.1 mm (0.004") increments to the specified system design.
Nozzles are supplied as standard in anodized aluminum.
20
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Pipe sizes and nozzle orifice sizes are selected by a UL listed computerized flow
calculation. Coverage of each nozzle and gas discharge by each nozzle is
considered to get minimum gas concentration at any point in the hazard
protected area.
• Pattern:
180°/
11
orifices
- 360° 112
orifices
• Material:
Gray
Anodized
Aluminum
Figure 2.10 Engineered Discharge Nozzle
2.3.2 Electrical Part
2.3.2.1 Control Hardware
The FIKE SHP PRO, (P/N 10-063) is a Conventional Control System designed to
provide a sophisticated, reliable conventional detection system for use with clean
agent extinguishing, pre-action/deluge, water mist, water flow alarm and fire alarm
systems. It is a microprocessor based system which can be easily configured for
a wide range of suppression applications.
The SHP PRO is designed for use with Fike Clean Agent Fire Suppressant, CO2,
or sprinkler (pre-action/ deluge) suppression systems. The main controller contains
all electronics required for a complete detection and control system suitable for
most applications. Optional modules, which plug into the main circuit board, are
available to add increased functionality to the system.
The SHP PRO provides 10 status LED's (AC normal, alarm, pre-discharge, release,
supervisory, trouble, panel silenced, abort, released disabled, ground fault) for
instant feedback. A diagnostic LED display is provided to help troubleshoot any
potential field problems, provide current status and retain stored events.
A reset and silence switch is provided to allow control of the system outputs and
operation.
21
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Figure 2.11 SHP PRO Extinguishing Control Panel
2.3.2.2 Electrical Accessories
A. The Manual Release Switch is a dual actuation device which provides a means of
manually discharging the automatic fire extinguishing system when used in
conjunction with the Fike Control Panel.
To operate the Manual Release Switch, pull the spring clip safety pin (breaking the
seal) and depress the button. The switch will remain engaged until released by
unlocking the button with a key. A single normally open contact block is provided.
The front housing of the release switch is constructed of stainless steel with the
keyed red plastic release button centered and bordered in black trim.
Actuation of manual release switch duplicates cross zoned detection condition

in the control panel and confirmed fire condition without time delay.
Figure 2.12 Manual Release Switch
22
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
B. The System Abort Switch is designed to be used in conjunction with other system
equipment. It provides a temporary manual means by which the system actuation
circuit may be interrupted, when operated prior to the circuit actuation.
The unit employs a momentary contact push button switch. While depressed, the
switch causes the agent release circuit to be manually delayed. Upon release of
the abort switch, the release circuit will follow the specific configuration of the
system control panel.
Abort switch is of the push button type which requires a constant pressure.
Release of gas will not happen till time the switch is kept hold and when released
time delay 0-30 seconds will start before the agent discharge function of this
switch is not available when manual release switch is operated.
Figure 2.13 System Abort Switch
2.3.2.3 Electrical Accessories
A. The Photoelectric smoke detector are reliable, high quality photoelectric smoke
detectors. They can be used in all open areas where photoelectric smoke
detectors are required, including in-duct applications.
¢
«
Figure 2.14 Smoke Detector
23
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
B. Fike's motor bell provides a better engineered motor bell for fire and life safety
alarm systems. A number of improvements have been built into the bell line,
including higher dBA, low current draw, built in trimplate for semi flush
mounting, low frequency aluminium shells and low RFI noise.
Figure 2.14 Motor Alarm Bell
C. The Wheelock's series MT and MT strobe Multitone electronic appliance offer a

choice of eight nationally and internationally recognized alerting sounds.
Figure 2.15 Horn Strobe
24
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
D. The relay module (CRM4) provides 4 additional independently programmed

relays that can support up to 2 CRM4 modules on the main controller board.
Each relay may be wired across normally open or normally closed contacts. It
interfaces to the main control board using four standoffs supplied with the CRM4.
Figure 2.16 CRM4 Relay Module
2.3.3 Warning and Instruction Signs, Illuminated Signs and Indicator

Lamps
A door notice and illuminated signs are required at each entrance to the risk
to advise personnel that they are entering a protected area.
EVACUATE Nol p08a

6$As DSC8ARGE gs s.a
Figure 2.19 Warning and Instruction Signs
25
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
3. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
26
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
3.0 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
3.1 FM 200 SYSTEM
T a bl e 3 1 FM 200 Sysrt:em E.quI pmen t S c h e d u I e

S. NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION MODEL MAKE
1 FM 200 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
a Agent Storage Containers As Per Design
b HFC 227ea -Agent FM200

Impulse Valve Operator Assy. c/w
C 02-12728
Accessories with IVOS.
FIKE
d Discharge Pressure Switch 02-12534
e Low Pressure Switch 02-12533
f Liquid Level Indicator 70-1353 Series
g Nozzle As Per Design
2 FM200 SYSTEM ELECTRICAL DEVICES

10-063-1-R-2/
a SHP- PRO Fire Extinguishing Panel
10-2452-1
b Smoke Detector 63-1308
C Manual Release Station 10-1638

FIKE
d System Abort Switch 10-1639
e Bell 20-110
20-132
f Horn Strobe
(MT-24MCW-FR)
g CRM4 10-2204
h Remote Indicator MS-RA AIR PRODUCT

QATAR FACTORY/
i Warning Sign / Illuminated Sign - SHIELD
3 FM200 CABLES & CONDUITS

a Fire Rated Cable, 300/500V SD-XPC series SHIELD
SMARTUBE/
b EMT Conduits EMT PANASONIC
27
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4 PIPES & FITTINGS

ASTM A53, Gr. B,
a Galvanized Steel Seamless Pipes Sch 40
SHIELD
DELCO RTE/
b Threaded Fittings 30001bs
BOTHWE
C Welded Fittings ASTM A234 SHIELD/TTU
SHIELD/
d Flanges CLASS 300
METALFA
28
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT
29
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4.0 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT
4.1 SAFETY
1. Only qualified personnel are permitted to assemble, operate or maintain this

equipment. Follow all the safety instructions. Failure to do so could result in
serious injury or death.
2. The entire manufacturer's safety instruction must be thoroughly read,

understood and strictly followed. All applicable safety regulations must be
observed.
3. Do not attempt to take action unless one is absolutely sure that he/she knows
exactly what is to be done. If in doubt, consult somebody who knows, or contact
the related Manufacturer's Representative.
4. Never allow untrained person to work on the equipment.
4.2 FM 200 SYSTEM
1. This system must be serviced by qualified personnel only.
2. Any environmental or operating condition which results in shorting or grounding

of the system components can result in malfunction or actual discharge of the
system.
3. Before servicing any component, disarm the control panel. Wait for 45 seconds
after removing all power to allow charge to bleed out from the capacitors in the
control panel.
4. The agent storage container is a pressurized vessel, and will cause

considerable thrust if the discharge valve is damaged. For this reason, the
safety cap supplied with the container must be in place securely fastened down.
The safety cap reduces and redirects the thrust if the valve is accidentally
damaged, and prevents objects from striking the internal parts of the valve.
5. Storage containers connected to a common manifold are interchangeable and

must be of the same size and charge. DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT SIZED
CONTAINERS WITHIN THE SAFE MANIFOLD CONNECTION.
6. Under normal conditions, there is no noticeable effect on human health by

breathing the FM200 agent. However, it is recommended not to enter a
protected area within 20 minutes of a discharge.
30
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4.3 HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION
HFC 227ea has been tested and verified to be safe for use in occupied spaces
when used as specified in NFPA 2001, and US EPA guidelines. Tests have
been proven that exposure to HFC 227ea is safe and the agent is effective in
extinguishing fires at lower concentrations; most of which are well below the
NOAEL and LOAEL values. HFC 227ea is approved for use in occupied
areas up to a 9% concentration (NOAEL) by volume without mandated egress
time up to a 10.5% concentration (LOAEL) with mandated egress time.
Exposure Limits
HFC 227ea systems provided for normally occupied spaces can be designed
for concentrations above to the NOAEL level of 9% by volume, given that
means be provided to limit exposure to design concentrations shown in the
table below that correspond to a maximum permitted human exposure time of
five (5) minutes.
Table 4.1 HFC 227ea Concentration Exposure
Human Exposure Time

HFC 227ea Concentration (Minutes)
9.0% 5.00
9.5% 5.00
10.0% 5.00
10.5% 5.00
11.0% 1.13
11.5% 0.60
12.0% 0.49
Warning: The discharge of clean agent system to extinguish a fire can result in
potential hazard to personnel from the natural form of the clean agent or from
products of combustion that results from exposure of the agent to the fire or hot
surfaces.
Unnecessary exposure of personnel or either to the natural agent or to the products

of decomposition shall be avoided.
HFC 227ea system is designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA 2001 as well as the limitations set forth by Underwriters
laboratories.
31
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4.4 ACCIDENT RELEASE MEASURES
Steps to be taken if material is released or spilled:
CAUTION! High Pressure Gas
1. Immediately evacuate all personnel from the danger area
2. Nitrogen is an asphyxiate. Lack of oxygen can kill. Use Self Contained

Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) where needed.
3. Shut off flow if you can do so without risk.
4. Ventilate area or move cylinder to a well-ventilated area. Test for sufficient

oxygen, especially in confined spaces, before allowing re-entry.
FM 200 Fire Suppression System can be modified to meet the site

requirements. The modification should be done by manufacture trained
competent person. Any changes in the piping system of FM200 system will
affect greatly the performance of the system.
At times, it may become necessary to make modifications to existing fire

suppression system. This can be done safely by a qualified installer or
contractor when the proper procedures are followed. The following procedure
has been developed to assure that the modifications are done successfully.
4.6 SAFE OPERATIONAL AND CONTROL
All repairs and service should be performed by AUTHORIZED SERVICE

PERSONNEL ONLY unless otherwise trained under specific operations and
controls to avoid unsafe operating procedure and moreover invalidity of product
warranty.
4.6.1 Safety
Inspection, testing, maintenance and operation activities shall be conducted in a

safe manner.
32
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
4.6.2 Confined Space
Appropriate and legally required precautions shall be taken prior to entering

confined space such as tanks, valve pits or trenches.
4.6.3 Fall Protection
Appropriate and legally required equipment shall be worn or used to prevent

injury from falls to personnel.
4.6.4 Special Hazards
Precautions shall be taken to address special hazards, such as protection

against drowning where working on the top of a filled embankment or a
supported, rubberized fabric tank, or over open water or other liquids.
4.6.5 Hazardous Materials
Any person performing inspection, testing, or maintenance or any system

covered within the scope of this document shall consult with the owner or
owner's representative in order to be fully knowledgeable of the hazardous
materials being used or stored on the premises. Appropriate and legally
required equipment shall be used where working in an environment with
hazardous materials present.
4.6.6 Electrical Safety
Extra care shall be taken where testing or maintaining any electrical equipment.
Only authorized personnel/ qualified personnel are allowed to deal with
concerning to electricity.
4.6. 7 Isolation
Prior to working on equipment, operatives should ensure the plant/ system etc.,
is physically isolated from potential energy sources, as required. All
operations and maintenance staff should be fully aware of and be familiar
with, all rules and regulations in force pertaining to safety.
It is recommended that effective Lock-Out-Tag-Out (LOTO) procedures are

implemented to safeguard operatives from the hazards of energy sources
(electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic and etc.) and that these procedure are strictly
followed.
33
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
5. OPERATION
34
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
5.0 OPERATION
5.1 FM 200 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

5.1.1 Automatic Detection and Release / Sequence of Operation
When any one detector in either circuit detects a fire, alarm LED on the panel
illuminates. Fire alarm bell also rings, silence the bell by pressing the silenced
button. When any alarm is silences, alarm silences LED illuminates. Diagnostic
LED shows which circuit is detected fire. Alarm condition of HFC-227ea release
control panel are transmitted to addressable type main fire alarm panel through
addressable monitor module. Hence, main fire alarm panel is in alarm. Then,
silence the main fire alarm panel. Check the protected area for any fire or
smoke source. In case of fire, extinguish it with the available portable fire
extinguisher installed nearby. When fire or smoke is cleared, reset the panel by
pressing the "reset" switch. When the release control panel is reset, the
main fire alarm panel will show reset function available single to reset to
normal condition.
In case no fire or smoke source is found, reset the extinguishing panel. If

alarm bell re-sounds, check and clean the detector by air blow. Then, reset
again. In case immediate or frequent detector false alarm, replace the detector.
5.1.1.1 Automatic Operation
A) Activation of any one of the detector in either circuit within the affected
area shall: (Alarm State);
1. Illuminate "Alarm" indicator on the control panel and display custom

LED
for proper zone indicator.
2. Activate Alarm Bell Inside the Protected area.
3. Send "Alarm" signal to main fire alarm control
panel.
B) Subsequent operation of a "cross-zoned" detector within the affected area shall

(Pre-Discharge State);
1. Illuminate "Pre-discharge" indicator on the control panel and display

custom
LED for proper zone indicator.
2. Activate audio/visual alarm indicator (strobe/Horn) inside & outside
the protected area.
3. Actuate circuit to energize 0-30 seconds adjustable "Evacuation
time".
4. Enable system abort sequence.
5. Illuminate "Evacuation Now-Gas Discharge" Warning sign inside the
protected area.
35
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6. Transfer relays to close associated fire damper or shut down HVAC

system.
C) After pre-set time delay sequence, the following shall occur (Release State);
1. Actuate circuit to release FM200 agent into the affected area.

2. Illuminate "Release" indicator on the control panel and display custom LED
for discharge indication.
3. Audio/visual alarm indicator (Strobe/Horn) inside & outside the protected
area remains active.
4. Illuminate warning sign 'Do not Enter-Gas Discharged" outside the protected
area activated by discharge pressure switch.
5. "Supervisory" signal (Gas discharged) to main fire alarm control panel via
extinguishing control panel relays.
5.1.1.2 Manual Operation
1. Activation of manual release station shall duplicate the "cross-zoned

detection" sequence described above except the time delay and abort
function.
2. System can be activated mechanically by depressing the red strike
button of the IVO located on cylinder head shall duplicate the "Cross
zoned detection" sequence described above except time delay and abort
and
5.1.1.3 Abort Operation
A. If abort switch is activated within Pre-discharge period, the following

shall occur:
1. Illuminate "Abort" indicator on the control panel and display custom LED
for proper zone indication.
2. Release of gas is held if abort switch is pressed continuously.
3. Agent will be released if abort switch is deactivated and countdown
is completed.
4. Send 'Trouble' signal to extinguishing control panel if the abort is initiated
with no alarm preset.
36
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
5.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEM
Further Dry contact out puts corresponding to trouble, Alarm and Pre-Discharge
states (i.e. HVAC shutdown, damper closure, etc.) are available in which are
utilized as per system requirements of each hazard. Details of connections are
shown in the schematic diagram.
l.2~
i
I
; 1.2
TRENCH OID
;
gj
aa, --
. 7j
cr1so' ~l 5] I l
fl[ill[[l fl [ ~h,
FECP
(SHP PRO PANEL)
l0 GREEN
EARTH GR0.
TO PRE AUN SYSTEM {COMMON FUIL/TROUBLE)
IO PRE ARN SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SU/PERMS.ION) PER SUPPLY TAPPED
WEAD OF BRSAKER
•
10 RE AUN S'STEN (GAS RE.5ED) %_
(BY EL£CIRO SECTON)
IO CU SHIDON -
[[ »] I0 DwER
ATuTOR -·[ J.[ SED GT-OUT
LOCO8.£ BR5ER
IO VGNETC DOOR HOLDER {IF £QUIPPED) - / BOX PANTED RED
[,] IO FRE ARM STE-2 (PRE DISC»RGE) (8r EIECTL SEC7ON)
IO IRE AUARN SAGE-1 {ARAN) -
v
(FECP SCHEMATIC LAYOUT

SCALE NTS
The Operation of the FM200 System is monitored via Fire Detection and Alarm
System. Any alarm initiated (i.e. smoke detector, manual release station, etc.)
signals are transmitted through interface dry contacts connected from
FM200
Extinguishing Control Panel to Fire Alarm Control Panel by hard
wiring
connections.
5.3 STEP BY STEP OPERATION PROCEDURES

37
Sequence of Operation (Automatic)
1. Activation of any one of the detector in either
circuit within the affected area shall:
• Illuminate the "ALARM" indicator on
the control panel and show "1." or "2." on
the LED display. RELEAS
E ARM
"gr
ii
so
• Illumination of Remote Indicator 5JPER/ISOrY
RELEASE DISABLED
(if installed). TROUBLE
RESET
• Energize Alarm Bell inside hazard area PANEL SILENCED

SILENCE
(1° ABORT
« • GROUND FAULT
Stage Alarm).
• Send signal to close associated fire
damper and or shut down HVAC (if
connected).
• Deactivate magnetically held door
(if connected).
• Send "Alarm" signal to Main Fire
Alarm Smoke Detector Alarm Bell
Control Panel.
2. Subsequent operation of a "cross-zoned" detector
within the affected area shall:
•
!QI; C
• Illuminate a "PRE-DISCHARGE" indicator NORMAL ~~
on the control panel and show "1." or "2."

on the LED display. ,,.., PREDISCHARGE 4
•
RELEASE Ea3L
-r- 4 d»
so
■
5JPER/ISOrY
@
installed).
• Illumination of Remote Indicator (if
•
«
RELEASE DISABLED
TROUBLE LruE
• ■
RESET
PANEL SILENCED
SILENCE
• Activate the Horn-Strobe inside the hazard
area (2nd Stage Alarm). Smoke Detector
• Actuate circuit to energize 30 second
adjustable "Evacuation Timer".
• Enable system abort sequence .
• Illuminates sign "Evacuate Now,
Gas Discharge".
ABORT
Q
« e GROUND FAULT
•
Horn-Strobe Abort Switch

3. Once the Evacuation Time ends, the following
~w
shall occur:
. .
!QI; C
NORMAL
• Actuate circuit to release FM2oo agent into ..
«
'+ ALARM
........ -~·.
affected area.
_ ._
PREDIS' CHARGE
~-
-r- RELEASE Ea3L

I
• Illuminate the "RELEASE" indicator on the
4
so d
■
@ LruE
control panel.
«• RELEASE DISABLED RESET
■•
TROUBLE
• Energize visual indicator (Strobe Light)
•e
PANEL SILENCED
SILENCE
outside the hazard area. Q ABORT
«
• Illuminates sign "Do Not Enter, Gas GROUND FAULT
Released".
• Send "Release" signal to Main Fire Alarm
Control Panel. 'FIRE: 'I
.. __. . :-.:~.
, ~I
.FIRE
Strobe
Sequence of Operation (Manual)
-
• Activation of Manual Release Station / ALARM
. . . . . . ......
IVO Push Button shall duplicate the l t+ 414
•
RELEASE EU3
I
"Cross• Zoned Detection" sequence 4
so
d
« LruE
described in
the Automatic Operation except Time
Delay,
dischargeAbort function, Pre- •
«
RELEASE DISABLED
■ RESET
■•
TROUBLE
PANEL SILENCED
indication and Alarm Bell. SILENCE
•
ABORT
« e GROUND FAULT
FIRE
.FIRE
Manual Release Impulse Valve Horn-Strobe Strobe

Station Operator
(IVO)
Abort Operation
□ Operation of Abort Switch within the Second Stage
Alarm (Pre-discharge period), the following shall occur:
• Illuminate "ABORT" indicator on the ,;;i.; C NORMAL '>
control panel and display LED Code A".
•
'
-r-
reset the evacuation time.

c/
JPER/ISOrY
• Press the ABORT SWITCH once and it will

,,.., PREDISCHARGE 414
··.·.......
RELEASE Ea3L
d»
AR1
« 5
« TROUBLE
I
Lru
• Press and hold the ABORT SWITCH and it will stop the
evacuation time BUT
will reset the evacuation time once hand is Et RELEASE DISABLED
RESET
removed from the switch.
Note:
« ABORT
• e GROUND FAULT
•
• Pressing RESET BUTTON in the control panel will
completely stop the operation of the System.
• Another method to prevent the agent from being
released is to REMOVE the IVO on the cylinder.
Abort Switch
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM

5.4.1 Storage Cylinders
Clean Agent cylinders are supplied with a pressure gauge that permits a quick
visual inspection of container pressure. Optional items include a Liquid Level
Indicator and a Low-Pressure Supervisory Switch. The Liquid Level Indicator
provides the convenience of determining the container's agent weight without
removing the cylinder from its location.
5.4.2 Main and Reserved Cylinders
Design wherein standby (back-up) cylinders are provided. In case of false discharge
occur, there is an immediate available agent supply for the continuous operation
of the system. The system is provided with the Main-Reserve selector
switch. Following a system discharge, reset any field devices. Once all devices
are in a standby status the Main-Reserve switch may be moved to "Reserve"
position. The control panel may be then reset to a normal mode for uninterrupted
protection. The empty "main" containers can be removed for recharge. After the
containers in the "Main" system have been recharged, the switch may be
returned to the "main" position.
5.4.3 Fire Extinguishing Control Panel
The SHP Pro provides dedicated alarm, trouble and supervisory SPOT contacts for
annunciation and control. If additional outputs are required, up to two CRM4 Relay
Modules can be added. The Extinguishing Control Panel is available in
5.4.4 Strobe
Selectable candela rating is available to suit with the hazard requirement based
on the NFPA/ ADA/ ANSI standards and guidelines.
5.4.5 Horn
Tone output can be selected in eight (8) available tone pattern, sound level,
OBA
and current ratings depending on the requirements
38
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6. MAINTENANCE
39
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6.0 MAINTENANCE
6.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
This section establishes the minimum requirements for the periodic inspection,
testing, and maintenance of fire suppression system. The type of system addressed
by this standard is FM 200 system.
The purpose of this document is to provide requirements that ensure a reasonable

degree of protection for life and property from fire through minimum inspection,
testing, and maintenance methods for fire detection system.
In those cases where it is determined that an existing situation can involve a distinct
hazard to life or property, the authority having jurisdiction shall be permitted to
require inspection, testing, and maintenance methods in excess of those
required by the standard.
6.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER OR OCCUPANT
1) The owner or occupant shall provide ready accessibility to components

of fire suppression system that require inspection, testing or
maintenance.
2) The responsibility for properly maintaining FM 200 system shall be that of the
owner(s) of the property. By means of periodic inspections, tests, and
maintenance, the equipment shall be shown to be in good operating
condition, or any defects or impairments shall be revealed. Inspection, testing,
and maintenance shall be implemented in accordance with procedures
meeting or exceeding those established in this document and in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. These tasks shall be performed by personnel
who have developed competence through training and experience.
3) The owner or occupant shall notify the authority having jurisdiction, the fire
department, if required, and the alarm-receiving facility before testing or shutting
down the system. The notification shall include the purpose for the shutdown,
the system or component involved, and the estimated time of shutdown. The
authority having jurisdiction, the fire department, and the alarm-receiving facility
shall be notified when the system, supply or component is returned to service.
4) The owner or occupant promptly shall correct or repair deficiencies,

damaged parts, or impairments found while performing the inspection, test, and
maintenance requirements of this standard. Corrections and repairs shall be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel or a qualified contractor.
40
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6.3 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR FM 200 SYSTEM
The maintenance procedures, at the intervals indicated, are meant to be a

minimum requirement for FIKE systems. The following procedures do not
preclude those required by NFPA 2001 and the authority having jurisdiction. More
frequent service intervals maybe necessary if systems are installed in more
severe service applications.
6.3.1 Discharge
Piping
Every six months
Check the system discharge piping for corrosion and damage. Check all
piping supports to make sure they are tight and the pipes are securely supported.
6.3.2 Discharge Nozzle
Every six months
Check to see those nozzles orifices are clear and unobstructed and those
orifices are not showing signs of corrosion.
Make sure that nozzles are aimed or position correctly. Verify with the system
plans that the correct nozzle part number is installed at the proper location in the
system.
6.3.3 Agent Storage

Containers
Every three months
Check the pressure gauge of each container. If the pressure is less than 360
PSIG to 70°F (2482 kpa @ 21.1 °C), the container should be removed, the
container pressure will vary directly with temperature. In the range of 50°F to
80°F (10°C to
27°C) this change is approximately 2.16 PSI (14.9 kpa) per
degree. Every six months
Verify the weight of the agent in each container matches the agent weight
stamped on the label. If the weight indicates a shortage exceeding five
percent of the required weight, the container must be removed from service for
repair and/or recharge.
Note:
If the container has a liquid level indicator installed, weight verification can be made
without the need for cylinder removal.
41
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Warning
The control panel must be disabled and the IVO must be shunted -
BEFORE
removing any container to be weighed.
After system discharge:
The container should be removed and sent to the factory, or an "authorized"

FIKE
distributor, for valve reconditioning and container re-charge.
6.3.4 Valve re-conditioning
After the container has been re-charge, the valve will need to be re-conditioned,
using the appropriate reload kit.
If the container was not discharge, and a leak valve needs to be reconditioned, the
contents of the container must be transferred to another container before
reconditioning the valve.
Warning:
Container contents are under high pressure. NEVER attempt to rebuild the valve
until the contents have been transferred and the pressure gauge read O PSIG (0
KPA).
Care should be taken when handling valve components to avoid damages of any
kind. Be careful not to bend, poke, or otherwise distort the valve rupture disc as its
service may be adversely affected.
6.3.5 Impulse Valve Operator
Impulse Valve Operator provides the means to electrically or manually activate the
Fike Impulse Valve clean agent containers. Upon activation, a pin is extended
with the force required to open the interval rupture disc, allowing the agent to
be released from the container.
Every six months
Check impulse valve operator and wiring agent release modules for corrosion. Also,
check for loose or broken wires.
6.3.6 Container Test and Inspection
HFC 227ea containers shall not be recharged without a retest if more than five
years have elapsed since the last test.
42
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Cylinders continuously in service without discharging shall receive a complete

external (visual) inspection every five years. The cylinder does not need to be
emptied for inspection.
All visual inspections must be performed according to the regulations of CFR

Title
49 and CGA Pamphlet C-6, Section 3. All inspections are to be done by CGA I
DOT
approved inspectors only. (Reference: NFPA No. 2001, Section
4)
6.3.7 Maintenance Schedule for HFC 227ea Fire Detection

System
All fire systems must be regularly tested and maintenance is essential as it

will prolong the life of a system and discover any faults that may occur. A system
that is not maintained cannot be guaranteed to protect life and property.
Periodic maintenance of FM200 system is essential to ensure that the system
is in full working condition.
Inspection, testing or maintenance shall be permitted to be done by a person

or organization other than the owner if conducted under a written contract. It shall
be done by qualified personnel.
A. Semi-annual maintenance procedure includes the

following:
1. Inspecting previous maintenance record (if

any).
2. Visually inspecting any structural or occupancy changes to access
whether changes to the fire alarm system is required.
3. Checking false alarm
records.
4. Battery checking and
testing.
5. Checking and testing of control panel
functions.
6. Testing of fire alarm
devices.
7. Checking automatic transmission of alarm signals to an alarm receiving
center including system interfaces (i.e. Main Fire Alarm System)
8. Checking and testing of all fault indicators and
circuits.
9. Testing of printers
10. Reporting of outstanding
defects
11. Records the maintenance activities
performed
B. Annual maintenance procedure includes the

following:
1. Testing of switch mechanism for every manual call
point
2. Examining and testing of every automatic fire
detector
3. Visual and audible testing of all fire alarm
devices
4. Replacement of filament
lamps
5. Checking of radio fire detection and fire alarm system signal
strengths
6. Visual inspection of readily accessible cable
fixings.
7. Checking of the cause and effect
program
43
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
8. Checking of standby power supply capacity

9. Reporting of outstanding defects
10. Records the maintenance activities performed
6.3.8 Inspection
Monthly visual inspection has to be done for the following:
1. Check all fire alarm equipment's to make sure nothing is damage or

inoperative.
2. Check detectors for any obstruction or damage
3. Check manual release for any obstruction or damage
4. Check bell or strobe horns for any obstruction of damage
A. Frequency: Monthly
Lamp test: When the panel is in normal condition, press "RESET BUTTON",
all LED on front part should illuminate. Notice the LED fails to illuminate.
Take action to rectify it.
Input circuits: Operate a device on each input circuit. Device tested should
operate in its normal manner. Record the specific device tested on each input
circuit so that different device can be used in subsequent tests. Check the
proper indication on panel, remote signal and operation signaling device and
record the location of any which are in-operative.
B. Frequency: Semi-annually
Circuit Monitoring: Test the input and output device circuit supervision by
disconnecting a conductor from its terminal in the control panel, the control
panel should receive trouble signal. Re-connect the wire to its terminal and reset
the control panel. Repeat the test for all supervised circuit.
Diagnostic LED code designations are mentioned in the "Installation
and
Operation Manual".
Smoke Detector: Functional test of smoke detectors are conducted by

spraying a smoke detector test aerosol into the detection chamber. Each
detector has a self-contained LED which illuminates steady when detector is
operated. When a detector is "operated", "alarm LED" on the panel should
energize and signaling device should operate.
Battery Voltage: Check battery terminal voltage without charger
44
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
C. Frequency: Annually
Primary power supply: Test the primary power supply during the test
for initiating and signaling device circuits. The primary power supply is
usually a
220 VAC circuit. Disconnect the primary power and make sure that the fire
alarm system performs normally using the secondary source of power
6.4 SMOKE DETECTOR MAINTENANCE
Smoke detector requires periodic Cleaning to remove accumulated dust or dirt.
Smoke Detector Cleaning Procedure:

1. Remove the sensor to be cleaned from the system.
2. Remove the sensor cover.
3. Vacuum the screen carefully without removing it.
4. Remove the chamber cover/screen assembly by pulling it straight out.
5. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the
sensing chamber.
6. Reinstall the chamber cover/screen assembly by sliding the edge over the
sensing chamber. Turn until it is firmly in place.
7. Replace the cover using the LEDs to align the cover and then gently pushing
it until it locks into place. Make sure that the thermostats do not become bent
under the cover on the detectors.
8. Reinstall the detector.
9. Test the detector as described in Testing Procedure.
10. Reconnect disabled circuits.
Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line
45
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6.5 DEALING WITH HAZARDS WHICH MAY ARISE DURING

MAINTENANCE
6.5.1 Safe Process Flow Chart
See it Assess it
• immediate • frequency and duration
observation of exposure
• severity/ consequences
• incident/accident
data
• workplace
inspections Use
• systems of work
• risk assessment process
• risk rating matrix
Use
• inspection checklist
e hazard control log
Fix it
• use hicrachy of controls
to allocate control measures
- temporary for immediate
action
perman ent to fix the
problem
Use
• hazard control log to
record control measures
Review it Evaluate it
• periodic review of • re-assess the hazard
your hazard
management svstem
Use Use
• continuous improvement • hazard control log to
cycle record results
Figure 6.1 Safe Process Flow Chart
46
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6.6 SPECIAL TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND ANCILLARY SERVICES

6.6.1 Special Tools
Table 6.1 Special Tools
SL. No. Description
1 Spanner
2 Wrenches
3 Screw Drivers, Pliers and Other Electrical Tools
6.6.2 Test Equipment

Table 6.2Test Equipment
SL. No. Description
1 Digital Multi-Meter
2 Pressure Gauge
3 Compressor
47
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
7. DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS
48
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
7 .0 DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS
7.1 METHOD OF SAFE DISPOSAL
Treatment, storage, transportation and disposal must be in accordance with

applicable Federal State / Provincial and local regulations. Incinerate material in
accordance with Federal State/ Provincial and Local requirements.
7.2 WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD
Prevent waste from contaminating the surrounding environment. Keep

personnel away. Discard any product, residue, disposable container or liner
in an environmentally acceptable manner, in full compliance with federal,
state, and local regulations.
Source from which further advice on safe disposal can be obtained:
a. Contact the manufacturer of the product and ask for propose disposal
instructions.
b. Contact a nearby electronics retailer and inquire into its disposal
programs. c. Contact the local authorities or disposal guidelines.
d. Contact private waste companies and recyclers to see if they accept

this waste.
49
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
8. TROUBLESHOOTING
50
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
8.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM
(FM2OO FECP SHP-PRO CONTROLLER TERMINAL DIAGRAM

SCA£ NS
8.2 CHECKPOINTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR FM 200

SYSTEM Table 8.1 Checkpoints and Corrective Actions for FM 200
System
Diagnostic
Display Description Tips for Resolution
Code
1 Detection Circuit 1 Open • Verify correct value of EOL resistor (4.3K n
- Yellow, Orange, Red)
2 Detection Circuit 2 Open • Measure field wiring resistance = 20 Q or
less.
• Verify all devices are installed properly
(smoke detector heads installed on bases).
• Remove field wiring and install a 4.3 0
resistor at the panel to verify the SHP pro
51
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
Control Board is functioning properly.

• Latching requires Reset to clear.
3 Input Circuit 3 Open • Verify correct value EOL resistor (20KQ •
4 Input Circuit 4 Open Red, Black, Orange)
5 Input Circuit 5 Open • Measure field wiring resistance = 100 Q or
less.
• Verify all field devices are installed
properly.
1 Detection Circuit 1 Activated • If device was not the cause of the
Detection Circuit 2 Activated activation, check field wiring for shorts, or a
2 Input Circuit 3 Activated faulty device.
• Verify correct value of EOL resistor.
3 Input Circuit 4 Activated • Input 1, 2 & 3 latching, requires reset to
clear.
4 Input Circuit 5 Activated • If application 3, input 4 latching, requires
rest to clear
6 Audible Circuit 1 Open • Verify correct value EOL resistor (1.2KQ•
Red, Violet, Red)
7 Audible Circuit 2 Open • Measure field wiring resistance
8 Audible Circuit 3 Open • Verify all field devices are installed
properly.
• Remove field wiring and install 1.2K n
resistor at the panel to verify the SHP pro
9 Agent Release Circuit Open • Verify correct value of EOL resistor (2.4KQ
- Red, Yellow, Red).
• Measure field wiring resistance
• Verify all field devices are installed
properly.
• Is agent disconnected switch in
disconnected mode?
• Remove field wiring and install a 2.4K n
resistor at the panel to verify the SHP Pro
• Latching requires reset to clear.
11 Solenoid Circuit Open • Measure field wiring resistance
• Verify all field devices are installed properly
• Remove field wiring and install a 2000, 5•
watt resistor (p/n 02-2686) at the panel to
simulate the solenoid and verify the SHP
Pro Control Board is functioning properly.
52
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
6 Audible Circuit 1 Shorted a

• Check field wiring for short circuit
or faulty device.
7 Audible Circuit 2 Shorted • If panel has released agent, reset the
8 Audible Circuit 3 Shorted •IVOVerify EOL resistor value is correct.
9 Agent Release Circuit
Shorted or Actuator Circuit
11 is Open
Solenoid Circuit Shorted
A Valid Abort • Normal Operation. No resolution
B
Abort Premature • Normal Operation. No resolution required
Abort Late • Normal Operation. No resolution required
C 2n Alarm Active on Input 1 • Input circuit 1 active. Verify cause
from if Using 430 Q bases. input device and not a short.
Only one 430 Q base active. • Check base wiring
Always activates on first
alarm if using 220 or 0 n
bases
C 20 alarm active on input 2 if • Input circuit 2 active. Verify cause

from using 430 Q bases input device and not a short.
Only one 430 Q base active. • Check base wiring
Always activates on first
alarm if using 220 or 0 n Latching requires reset to
clear. bases •
d Output Disabled • Check switch 3 ( enable/ disable) to see if it
is in the disable position.
E Missing Battery • Verify batteries are installed properly
• Verify each battery has approximately the
same voltage
..
• Remove battery w ng harness and
replace with a 4.30, % watt resistor (same
as detection EOL, 10-2318) and
verify charger voltage.
F Low Voltage (<19 VDC) • Check AC and DC power input
H lntelli-FET lost • Reset panel, if trouble does not

clear, replace SHP Pro Control Board.
H 5V Reference I ADC Failure • Reset panel, if trouble does not clear,
replace SHP Pro Control Board.
53
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
0 Ground Fault • Remove field wiring from terminal strips to

isolate the wire with the ground fault. When
panel clears, troubleshoot the wire.
0 Resettable AUX power • Remove field wiring from resettable AUX
missing circuit and check fuse F3. If fuse is blown,
replace fuse and check field wiring for
short.
0 Continuous AUX power • Remove field wiring from continuous AUX
missing circuit and check fuse F4. If fuse is blown,
replace fuse and check field wiring for
short.
p Reset • Normal Operation. No resolution required.
- AC Brown-out ( <85% AC) • Measure primary voltage to transformer

and secondary voltage off transformer.
54
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
9. MANUFACTURERS
55
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
9.0 MANUFACTURERS
Table 9.1 Manufacturer's Information
QATAR FACTORY - NAFFCO
Company Address P.O. Box 55644, Doha, Qatar
Telephone Number +974 4402 5888
Facsimile Number +974 4411 4630
E-mail Address (Inquiry) gsales@qatarfactory.qa
Website www.qatarfactory.qa
FIKE Corporation
704 South 10t Street, P.O. Box 610 Blue
Company Address Springs, Missouri 64013, U.S.A
Telephone Number +800 979-3453 / +816 229-3405
Facsimile Number +816 229-0314
Website www.fike.com
SHIELD
Redburn House 2a Tonbridge Road, Romford,

Company Address Essex, RM3 8QE, UK
Telephone Number +44 1708 377731
Facsimile Number +44 1708 347637
E-mail Address (Inquiry) shielduk@shieldglobal.com
Website www.shieldglobal.com
56
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
10. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
57
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
10.0 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
Manufacturer will provide a warranty of 400 days from the date of handing over.
10.1 CIRCUMSTANCES AND CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT

THE VALIDITY OF WARRANTY
The validity of the warranty is not valid for the following condition;
a. Abuse, improper environmental condition, shipping damage, unauthorized

modification, service by unauthorized personnel, transportation of damaged
equipment or acts of war.
b. Damage due to lack of maintenance or damage resulting from installation in

areas with other than normal Damage due to acts of nature but not limited to
lighting, flooding, explosions and earthquakes.
10.2 GUARANTEE CERTIFICATES
Specific warranty/guarantee certificates can be found in the final turn over.
58
QRTRR
FRCTORY
Ref. No. XXXXXXXXX SO Ref. XXXXXX
WARRANTY CERTIFICATE
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, MADE BY QATAR FACTORY
FOR FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT & SAFETY SYSTEMS NAFFCO ON NEW
EQUIPMENT, EXCEPT A WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIAL SET OUT BELOW:
1. Qatar Factory warrants the following products supplied, installed, tested
& commissioned against purchase order ref. no. XXXXXXXX dated XXXXXXXXX
shall be free from defects in material:
Project : Seven Service Hubs
Contractor : M/s. Al Muntasser Contracting and Trading Co.
Systems : FM200 System
2. Qatar Factory obligation and liability under this warranty is limited to

rectification or replacement of any part/s found defective under normal use and
service, within
400 days from handling over (XXXXX).
3. This Warranty Certificate must be presented to obtain services pursuant to the

warranties set forth herein.
4. This warranty does not cover sets repaired by workshops not authorized by Qatar
Factory.
5. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any
implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose and the
obligation and liability of Qatar Factory under this warranty shall not include any
transportation, any other charges, liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages and delay resulting from the defect or any other obligations or liability on
the part of Qatar Factory, and Qatar Factory neither assumes nor authorizes any
other person to assume for it any other liability in connection with such equipment.
Any improper use or application of the product or the substitution of any parts not
approved by Qatar Factory shall void this warranty. Failure to provide regular
maintenance in accordance with safety regulations shall likewise void this
warranty. This warranty covers only the products listed in paragraph 1 above.
6. Service policy.
This warranty is void in case of full payment of the above mentioned project is
not received.
QATAR FACTORY for Fire Fighting Equipment & Safety Systems NAFFCO
Company Stamp
For Fire Fighting Equipment T. +974 4402 5888 F. +97444114630 For Complaints & Queries email to:
& Safety Systems - NAFFCO www.qatarfactory.qa info@qatarfactory.qa
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
11. EMERGENCY INFORMATION
59
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
11.0 EMERGENCY INFORMATION
Contact information during emergency.
11.1 GENERAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION
Table 11.1 Emergency Information
In the event of Contact Local Telephone Numbers
Fire Fire Brigade 999

Electrical Failure Emergency 991
Water Failure Emergency 991
Matters Required Police Police 999
Need for Ambulance Ambulance 999
Need for Hospital Hamad Hospital/ HMC 4439 4444
Need for Police Traffic Department 999
Need for Telephone Number Qatar Telecom (Ooredoo) 180
60
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
61
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12.0 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
Table12.1 List of Manufacturer's Literature
SL. NO. Item Description

12.1 Mechanical Equipment
12.2 Electrical Devices
12.3 Cable & Conduits
12.4 Pipes & Fittings
12.5 FM200 System Maintenance Manual
12.6 Shop Drawing
62
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. 1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
63
Qatar Factory
For Fire Fighting Equipment & Safety Systems NAFFCO
FM200 System
Mechanical Equipment
I
Quality Reliability Services
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
P.O. Box 55644, Doha, Qatar, Tel.: (00-974) 44025888, Fax (00-974) 44114630, Web:
www.gatarfactory.ga
For Complaints & Queries email to - info@qatarfactory.qa
e
Fike DATA SHEET
AGENT STORAGE CONTAINERS WITH HFC-227EA
DESCRIPTION
Fike Clean Agent Containers are used in fire extinguishing systems to store the Clean Agent until a fire
develops and the agent must be released. The Clean Agent is retained in the container by a Impulse Valve
assembly which contains a fast-acting rupture disc. The disc will be ruptured, and the Clean Agent released,
through the operation of an actuator by an electric signal that is automatically, manually or pneumatically
controlled.
Fike Clean Agent Containers have passed extensive testing by Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratory
and are used in installations where 3 to 1045 pounds (2.0 to 474 kg) of HFC-227ea agent is required. Clean
Agent containers can be filled in 1 pound (0.S kg) increments to their maximum capacity.
SPECIFICATION l
S 3
40 to 70 lbs/ft (630 t0 1121 kg/m )
Fill Range:
Fill Increments: 1.0 lbs (0.S kg)
Container Super - Pressurization Level: 360 psig at 70'F (24.8 bar at 21c)
after filling with dry nitrogen
Container Storage Temperature Limitation: 32°F (0°C) - minimum, 130F (54.4°C) - maximum
APPROVALS:
Note: if container temperatures exceeding 130F (54.4C), valve will open automatically, this also fulfills the pressure • UL Listed
relief valve requirements in accordance with DOT regulations. • ULC Listed
• FM Approved
Container Construction: Carbon Steel Alloys
Paint Options: Baked enamel finish white (default) or red
Container Ratings: DOT 4BWS00
TC4BWM534
@
Actuation Methods: Electric/Pneumatic/Manual
LISTED
<@>
APPROVED
Form No. IV.1.01.01-4
704 SW 10th Street • P.O. Box 610 • Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610
U.S.A. Phone: 816·229·3405 • www.fike.com
CONTAINER DATA/SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Container Fill range
Valve Size Tare Weight (approximate)
Mounting
Size Minimum Maximum Diameter Height Position
P/N
Lb. (L) lbs. (kg) lbs. (kg) IN(mm) lbs. (kg) IN(mm) IN(mm)
5 3 5 1 11 4.2 16.2 Upright
70-272
(2) (2.0) (2.5) (25) (5.0) (102) (411.5) (Valve Up)
10 6 10 1 15 4.2 27.24 Upright
70-273
(4) (3.0) (4.5) (25) (6.8) (102) (691.9) (Valve Up)
20 12 21 1 22 7.0 22.50 Upright•
70-263
(8.5) (5.5) (9.5) (25) (10.0) (178) (571.5) Horizontal
35 22 38 1 32.5 7.0 33.75 Upright•

(15) 70-264 (10.0) (17.0) (25) (14.7) (178) (857.3)
Horizontal
60 39 68 1 52.5 10.75 28.13 Upright•

(27) 70-265 (18.0) (30.5) (25) (23.8) (273) (714.4)
Horizontal
100 63 108 1 77 10.75 39.63 Upright

70-266
(44) (28.5) (49.0) (25) (34.9) (273) (1006.5) (Valve Up)
150/150i 87 150 3 118/114 20.0 24.25
70-267
Upright/Inverted
(61) (39.5) (68.0) (80) (53.5/51.7) (508) (616.0)
215 124 216 3 146 20.0 30.13 Upright
70-268
(88) (56.5) (98.0) (80) (66.2) (508) (765.2) (Valve Up)
375 217 378 3 213 20.0 43.38 Upright

70-269
(153) (98.5) (171.5) (80) (96.6) (508) (1101.7) (Valve Up)
650 378 660 3 373 24.0 50.50 Upright
70-270
(267) (171.5) (299.0) (80) (169.2) (610) (1282.7) (Valve Up)
1000 598 1045 3 535 24.0 71.88 Upright

70-271
(423) (271.5) (474.0) (80) (242.7) (610) (1825.6) (Valve Up)
2 of 7
ITEM S SU PPLI ED W ITH CO NTA IN ER A SSEM B LY
Item Number Description Data
Sheet
Item 1
1 Victaulic Coupling & Nipple
IV.1.19.01 Item 2
2 Impulse Valve Item 3 Item 4

IV.1.14.01
ltem 5
3 Pressure Gauge
IV.1.13.01
4 Liquid Level Indicator (LLi)
C.1.40.01
5 Lli Boss (see note 1) n/a
Item 6
6 Nameplate (see note 2) n/a
7 Siphone Tube (see note 3) n/a
8 Mounting Straps & Brackets
IV.1.18.01
Notes:
1} 100 thru 1000 lb. (44 thru 423 L} containers are equipped with a LLi Boss.
I+--
2} Fike nameplate provides the information that is specific ta each container:
Assembly and serial number af the container, weight information: tare, grass and
Item 7
agent and installation, operation and safety information. All containers filled either lt<m ,
by the factory
ar by an Approved Initial Fill Station are provided with a name plate bearing the UL & FM
markings.
3) Fike Clean Agent containers [except the 150i {Inverted)} are equipped with a siphon
tube. The 20, 35 & 60 lb. containers have bent siphon tubes and the 5, 10 and 100•
1000 lb. containers have straight siphon tubes. All containers with siphon tubes can
be mounted upright. The 20, 35 & 60 lb containers can also be mounted horizontally.
The
150 container can only be mounted upright and the 150i can only be mounted inverted.
3 of 7
OPTIONAL ITEMS FOR CONTAINER
The following container accessory items must be ordered separately.
ACTUATION COMPONENTS
• Electric/ Manual Actuation - Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) (For detailed information, refer to the IVO Data Sheet IV.1.09.01)
Impulse Valve Operator

(IVO)
Container w/ Impulse Valve
• Pneumatic Actuation - Impulse Valve Pneumatic Operator (IVPO) (For detailed information, refer to the IVPO Data Sheet IV.1.10.01)
Container w/ Impulse Valve
Impulse Valve Pneumatic

Operator (IVPO)
ACTUATION METHODS
Clean Agent containers with an Impulse Valve can be actuated by the following methods:
• Method 1- Electric Actuation - Single Container System w/ IVO & IRM
• Method 2 - Electric Actuation -- Multi-Containers System w / IVO & IRM
• Method 3-Electric & Pneumatic Actuation -- Two Container System w/ IVO & IVPO
• Method 4 - Electric & Pneumatic Actuation - Multi Container System w/ IVO & IVPO
For detailed information on actuation methods, refer to the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) data sheet IV.1.09.01.
These devices provide the force required to extend a pin that will open the rupture disc, allowing the agent to be released from
the container.
4 of 7
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
The Low Pressure Switch provides a means to continuously
monitoring the container pressure for a low-pressure condition.
Low Pressure Switch
If the pressure inside the container drops below 288 psig (1986 kPa),
the switch contacts will transfer and invoke a "trouble" indication on the
control panel.
The Low Pressure Switch (P/N 02-12533) has a single pole, double-
throw switch that can be wired for normally open or normally closed.
For detailed information, refer to the Low Pressure Switch Data Sheet
IV.1.13.01.
INSTALLATION Container wl Impulse

The system installation must comply with the requirements of this Valve
manual; NFPA 2001, latest edition; all applicable local codes, regulations,
and standards and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Warning: DO NOT start system installation until the final design of the total system has been verified using Fike's Engineered Flow
Calculation.
Warning: The Actuator shall always be the last component installed on a Fike Clean Agent Fire Suppression system to avoid
accidental discharge.
Factors to Consider - Container Location

Mounting Surface: Container brackets must be mounted securely to solid load-bearing surfaces that will support the container
load. Some installations may require additional mounting support not supplied by Fike.
Environmental Effects: Container(s) should be located in clean, dry, and relatively vibration-free areas. Avoid aisle ways and other
high traffic areas where physical damage or tampering is more likely. Container(s) should never be mounted
where the container could potentially be splashed with, or submerged in any liquid. Do not locate
containers where they would be subject to physical damage, exposure to corrosive chemicals, or
harsh weather conditions.
Temperature Range: Container locations must be between 32 to 130°F (Oto 54.4°C). Temperatures outside of this range may
result in the system not supplying the desired quantity of agent or accidental discharge.
Serviceability: In general, the larger the container, the more difficult it will be to remove it from the system for
maintenance and service. However, smaller containers that are located in a sub-floor space, under a
computer bank, or above the ceiling over the same computer bank can be difficult as well.
Floor Space: Consideration should be given to the space available to install the container(s).
For example, a 900 lb. (408 kg) system could be stored in (2) 650 lb. (267 L) containers located on the floor.
However, if floor space is a problem, the system could be designed to utilize (6) 150i lb. (61 L) Inverted
Containers mounted on the wall(s).
Floor loading must be considered when selecting a container location. The floor must be able to support the
Floor Loading: total weight of the Fike container(s) as they are moved into position. Consult raised floor manufacturer for
floor loading limitation. The following guidelines are recommended:
• Raised floor loading is a function of the manufacturer's load specification and the positioning of the
container(s) on the raised floor grid.
Note: Fike con not assume responsibility for determining the suitability of o particular raised floor system; the
following does provide information to help determine installation requirements.
• When clean agent containers are located on a raised floor, floor integrity must be considered to determine
if the type of tile and vertical floor support can handle the increased load. If necessary additional floor
supports can be added.
Option: To help distribute the container weight over a greater area, a %" steel plate can be placed under
the container(s), sized to span multiple floor supports. If container spans multiple floor tiles, add
additional floor supports (Minimum of 4 floor supports, 1 per corner, must be used). Excessive floor
loading may
require relocating the container(s) to a more suitable location. For floor loading information refer to the
table on page 6 or to Fike's ECARO-25 Flow Calculation program for container size and actual fill weight being
supplied.
5 of 7
Container Floor A rea
Total Container w/ Plate Container w/ Plate
Container Floor Container Floor
C Floor
ontainer
lb. (L) Size Weight
lbs. (kg) 1/4: x x2'0.6m
(6.4mm x 2' plate
x 0.6m
Area Loading Loading
lbs/ft (kg/m') lbs/ft (kg/m')
ft (m)
see note 1 plate)
see note 2
ft? (m')
1000 (423) 1386 (628) 3.14 (0.29) 508 (2493) 4.0(0.36) 404 (2037)
650 (267) 913 (41) 3.14 (0.29) 333 (1636) 4.0(0.36) 267 (1467)
375 (153) 527 (239) 2.18 (0.20) 277 (1368) 4.0(0.36) 156 (788)
215 (88) 328 (148) 2.18 (0.20) 170 (840) 4.0(0.36) 98 (495)
150 (61) 283 (128) 2.18 (0.20) 138 (680) 4.0(0.36) 81 (406)
100 (44) 164 (74) 0.63 (0.06) 294 (1400) 4.0(0.36) 52 (262)
60 (27) 106 (48) 0.63 (0.06) 190 (908) 4.0(0.36) 36 (180)

35 (15) 51 (23) 0.27 (0.03) 256 (115) 4.0(0.36) 23 (114)
20 (8.5) 37 (17) 0.27 (0.03) 156 (72) 4.0(0.36) 16 (83)
10 (4) 23 (11) 0.10 (0.009) 250 (1278) 4.0(0.36) 12 (60)

5(2) 15 (7) 0.10 (0.009) 160 (833) 4.0(0.36) 10 (49)
Notes:
1} Total container weight is based on container tare weight+ maximum fill weight
2} Total container weight+ 22.5 lbs {10.2 kg) added for 1/4" 2' x 2' (6.4mm x 0.6m x 0.6m} plate used to calculate container with plate floor loading
6 of 7
RECHARGE ITEMS - 1 IN (25) & 3 IN (80) VALVE (Must Order Separate)
After a system has been discharged, the following items must be replaced before a container can be recharged. For a detailed
procedure on recharging a Fike container w/ an Impulse Valve refer to Fike's Recharge Manual (p/n 06-290).
1 IN (25mm) Recharge Kit 3 IN (80mm) Recharge Kit

(P/N 85-047) includes the (P/N 85-048 includes the
Item Description following: following:
Part Number Part Number
1 Friction Ring 70-2060 70-2063
2 Disc Assembly 70-247 70-248
3 O-Ring 02-11987 02-11989

4 Valve Core-Fill Port (not shown) 02-4161 02-4161
5 Reconditioning Instructions (not shown) 06-567
Note: 1 IN Recharge Kit is used on 5, 10, 20, 35, 60 & 100 lb. (2, 4, 8, 15, 27 & 44 L) containers
3 IN Recharge Kit is used on 150, 150i, 215, 375, 650 & 1000 lb. (61, 61i 88, 153, 267 & 423 L) containers
Item 1-- Friction Ring
-·O
Item 2- Disc Assembly
Item 3 - 0-Ring
Copyright © Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved.

Form No. IV.1.01.01-4, February 2012. Specifications are subject to change without
7 of 7
notice.
Fike DATA SHEET
I HFC-227EA CLEAN AGENT I APPROVALS:

• UL Listed
• ULC Listed
DESCRIPTION • FM Approved
HFC-227ea provides superior fire protection in a wide range of applications from sensitive electrical
equipment to industrial applications using flammable liquids. HFC-227ea is ideal for applications where
clean-up of other media presents a problem, where weight versus suppression potential is a factor,
@
where an electrically non-conductive medium is needed and where people compatibility is an
overriding
factor. When environmental impact is a consideration, HFC-227ea is particularly useful. It has zero ozone•
depleting potential, low global warming potential and a short atmospheric lifetime. These
characteristics make it suitable not only for new installations using Fike's total flooding systems, but also
for Halon 1301 replacement applications. LISTED
<@>
HFC-227ea is an odorless, colorless, liquefied compressed gas. (See Physical Properties Table for additional
information). It is stored as a liquid and dispensed into the hazard as a colorless, electrically non-
conductive vapor that is clear and does not obscure vision. It leaves no residue and has acceptable toxicity
for use in occupied spaces at design concentration. HFC-227ea extinguishes a fire by a combination of APPROVED
chemical and physical mechanisms. HFC-227ea does not displace oxygen and therefore is safe for use in
occupied spaces without fear of oxygen deprivation.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS

• Colorless, odorless, liquefied compressed gas
• Stored as a liquid
• Electrically non-conductive
• Discharges as a gaseous vapor (due to its relatively low boiling point)
• Zero ozone depleting potential
• Low global warming potential
• Included on the U.S. EPA Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP) rules
EXTINGUISHING METHOD - HFC-227ea

HFC-227ea extinguishes a fire primarily through Heat Absorption that occurs as the agent changes from a
liquid to a vapor during discharge. In addition, HFC-227ea also disrupts the combustion reaction which
aids in the extinguishment of a fire. It is important to note, HFC-227ea does not use the depletion of
oxygen to extinguish a fire.
USE AND LIMITATIONS - HFC-227ea

HFC-227ea system shall be used on the following Class of
Hazards: Class A & C: Electrical and Electronic
Hazards
Telecommunications Facilities
High value assets, where the associated down-time would be costly
Class B: Flammable liquids and gases
HFC-227ea systems shall "NOT" be used on fires involving the following materials:
Chemicals or mixtures of chemicals that are capable of rapid oxidation in
the absence of air. (Examples include: Cellulose Nitrate and Gunpowder)
Reactive metals such as Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium, Titanium,
Zirconium, Uranium, and Plutonium
Metal hydrides such as Sodium Hydride and Lithium Aluminum Hydride
Chemicals capable of undergoing auto-thermal decomposition.
(Examples: Organic Peroxides and Hydrazine)
Form No. IV.1.02.01-2
EXPOSURE LIMITATIONS
Maximum Human
Hazard Type Design Concentration
Expose Time
Normally Occupied Space 6.25% to 10.5% 5 minutes
Normally Un-Occupied Space 11.0% to 12.0% 30 seconds
Note: Fike does not recommend HFC-227ea systems to be used in any normally occupied spaces where the design concentration rquired is above 10.5%
Warning: The discharge of clean agent systems to extinguish a fire con result in potential hazard to personnel from the naturalform of the clean agent
or from the products of combustion that result from exposure of the agent to the fire or hot surfaces. Unnecessary exposure of personnel either to the
natural agent or to the products of decomposition shall be avoided.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Chemical Name/Formula Heptafluoropropane / CF,CHFCF,

ASHRAE Designation HFC-227ea
CAS Number 431-89-0
Molecular Weight 170.03

Vapor Density @ 25C(77F) and atm, kg/m? (lb/ft) 7.148 (0.4462)
Boiling Point, 1 atm, •c (°F) -16.4(2.5)
Melting Point, "C ("F) -131(-204)

Critical Temperature, C ("F) 101.6 (214.9)
Critical Pressure, kPa (psia) 2930 (424.7)
Critical Density, kg/m? (lb/ft) 621(38.77)

Liquid Density @ 25C (77F), kg/m (lb/ft) 1386 (86.53)
Vapor Density @ 25C(77F) and 1 atm, kg/m? (lb/ft) 7.148 (0.4462)

Specific Heat, Liquid (Cp)@ 25°C (77°F), kJ/Kg- ·c (Btu/lb°F) 1.247 (0.2979)
Specific Heat, Vapor (Cp) @ 25°C (77F) k/Kg- "C (Btu/lb"F) and 1 ATM 0.8136 (0.1945)
Vapor Pressure, Saturated @ 25C(77F), kPa (psia) 453.3 (65.7)
Heat of Vaporization @ Boiling Point k/Kg (Btu/lb) 132.6(56.7)
Thermal Conductivity, Liquid @ 25°C(77F), W/m- "C (Btu/hr-ft"F) 0.0533 (0.0308)

Thermal Conductivity, Vapor @ 25C (77F), W/m- "C (Btu/hr-ft"F) 0.0127 (0.0073)
Viscosity, Liquid @ 25°C (77F), cP (lb/ft-hr) 0.2442 (0.5907)
Relative Dielectirc Strength @ 1 atm, 25°C (N2=1) 2.00

Solubility of Water in HFC-227ea @ 20°C (68F), ppm 600
Ozone Depletion Potential 0.0
Global Warming Potential (based on a 100-yr ITH for CO2, GWP = 1) 2900
Copyright © Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved. 2 of 2

Form No. IV.1.02.01-2, August 2012. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fike I PRODUCT UPDATE I
I IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR UPDATE I
Recent updates to UL test procedures and standards have led to a

change to the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO). DIN connectors are
no longer an approved method of connecting fire suppression
actuators to a releasing circuit. UL 2127 and UL 2166 both
require a connection from the control box to releasing device that
is enclosed. The DIN connector no longer meets the intent of
these two standards.
To allow for an "enclosed" connection the IVO will now have %"
conduit threads. This eliminates the need for the DIN
connector. Installation still requires landing 2 wires on the IRM
Phase-2 IVO
but is simplified by requiring one less part to be installed (the
w/ wire leads
DIN connector).
Fike will maintain a stock of DIN connectors and keep them

available for purchase. Legacy actuators are not required to be
removed or replaced. After the transition from Phase-1 to Phase-2
there will no longer be actuators with DIN connections for
purchase. This update is scheduled for all electrical Fike fire
suppression actuators used for ECARO-25, FM-200, PROINERT,
and Nitrogen Actuators.
If you have any further questions please contact Fike technical

support at 1-800-979-3453 option 2-2.
Phase-1 IVO w/
DIN connection
WWW.Fike.com Form NO. FPGPU17-002, March, 2017
1 of 1
This document is only intended to be a guideline and is not applicable to
all situations. Information subject to full disclaimer at
http://www.fike.com/disclaimer
Fike DATA SHEET
I IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR (IVO) KIT I
DESCRIPTION
The Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) provides means to electrically or manually activate the Fike
Impulse Valve clean agent container by providing the force required to extend a piston that
will open the rupture disc, allowing the agent to be released from the container.
The IVO can be activated electrically via a signal from Fike control panel or manually
by depressing red strike buttom.
Fike Clean Agent Containers with Impulse Valve must use an Impulse Releasing Module
(IRM) to supervise the agent release circuit wiring (for open and ground fault conditions)
from the container to the control panel.
SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS:
Normal Supply Voltage: 24VDC • UL Listed
Current Consumption: 0 Amps (for Battery Calculation) • ULC Listed
Electrical Connection: DIN connector w/ Cable & %" NPT for conduit connection • FM Approved
IVO Material: Stainless Steel (Body)/ Brass (End Cap)
Temperature Range: 32 to 130°F (0 to 54.4C)
Environment: Indoor Use Only
@2
ORDERING INFORMATION
Item No. Fike P/N Description

70-279 IVO Kit (includes all items listed LISTED
below)
1 02-12728 IVO
3
70-286
02-12755
Reset Tool
Wire Lead (3' long) with connector
<@>
APPROVED
4 10-2748 IRM
Item No. 2 Item No. 1 Item No. 4
l _
l
; •
j;#z
d 4£
•
%
Item No. 3
Form No. IV.1.09.01-1
INSTALLATION
After the electrical/ control system has been checked out and no trouble/ ground faults are present; proceed with the Actuation
System installation.
Note: This should be the last items completed before the system is placed into operation.
Important Note: Check to ensure /VO is armed (Firing Pin retracted) and Safety Pin is place before installing ta the Impulse Valve an the container.
No Pin Exposed
(Armed Position)
Install the wire lead w/ connector (Item no. 3) to the IVO (Item no. 1) connector and secure with set
screw. Install lVO; remove Retaining Clip and Plastic Plug from Impulse Valve Actuation Port.
Insert IVO into Impulse Valve Actuation Port and re-insert Retaining Clip.
Actuation Port
Retaining Clip
1
IVO
( 1 s
The container is "NOW ARMED".
2 of 6
ELECTRIC ACTUATION -- SINGLE CONTAINER SYSTEM W/ IVO
For wiring installation details between Fike Control Panel, IRM and the IVO, reference the Impulse Release Module Product Manual
(P/N 06-552).
At this point the IVO can be installed to the Clean Agent Container Impulse Valve. The Discharge Pressure Switch (P/N 02-12534)
is required and is wired to the manual release contact in SHP PRO or to a monitor module in Cheetah® Xi or Xi 50.
Warning: Da not attempt to install the /VO with the firing pin in the extended position.
---7
1+1----
I
IRM Assembly (p/n 10-2748)
I
Discharge
IL!
1 Pressure Switch
"
jijli=
0
~
- ._
\
IVO w/ Manual Strike Button
ELECTRIC ACTUATION -- MULTI- CONTAINER SYSTEM W/ IVO

Maximum of 6 IRMs can be wired
«d Fike Control Panel
to a single Fike Control Panel)
----7 r-----------------, ,-----------------7 ri )-

1 I I I I I
j, I
di
'
I
I
ms
t10-2748)
I I I
] I ]I Il
I I I
v
v
0 0 0
2
IVO w/ Plastic Cap/ Manual Strike Button removed (Typical for containers)
Important Note: When utilizing electric actuation (IRM) with multiple containers with /VO, the manual strike button on each /VO must be removed and
plastic cap installed. The Discharge Pressure Switch is NOT used. This is to prevent a single container from being discharged in a multiple container
system.
For wiring installation details between Fike Control Panel, /RM and the IVO, reference the Impulse Release Module (IRM) Product Manual (P/N 06-
552). At this point the /VO can be installed to the Clean Agent Container Impulse Valve.
Reference detailed installation instructions on page 2 of this data sheet
ELECTRIC & PNEUMATIC ACTUATION -TWO CONTAINER SYSTEM W/ IVO &IVPO
1 02-4530 " NPT x ¼" JIC Adaptor (must be ordered separately)

2 02-4977 4" IC x 3.0' lg. Actuation Hose (supplied w/ IVPO kit) (see note)
3 02-4543 1/8" NPT x ¼" JIC Adaptor (supplied w/ IVPO kit)

4 02-12926 4" IC Male Adaptor (must be ordered separately)
Note: This actuation method requires 2 - ¼" JIC x 3.0' lg. Actuation Hoses, 1 hose supplied w/ IVPO kit, the 2nd Actuation Hose must be ordered separately.
3 of 6
Fike Control Panel
« a.
-----,
NOTE: Install Discharge
Pressure Switch on
IRM Assembly (p/n 10-2748)
Container w/ IVPO
A daptor r1
i}
I
2 (see note)
N ip ple w
l
.L"a<'; t
¼" Plug I
I
V Discharge
Pressure Switch
«IVO w/Manual Strike (p/n 02-12534)
0 Button
\
First remove the %" NPT Plug from Adaptor Nipple, then install Actuation System as shown above. Secure Actuation tubing to a solid
surface. Anchoring into plaster, sheetrock wall or any other facing material is NOT acceptable. For additional information regarding
the installation and resetting of the IVPO, refer to the IVPO Data Sheet IV.1.10.01
The Discharge Pressure Switch (P/N 02-12534) is required and is wired to the manual release contact in SHP PRO or to a monitor
module in Cheetah Xi or Xi 50.
ELECTRIC & PNEUMATIC ACTUATION - MULTI CONTAINER SYSTEM W/ IVO & IVPO

1 02-4530 " NPT x ¼" JIC Adaptor (must be ordered separately)
2 02-4977 4" IC x 3.0' lg. Actuation Hose (supplied w/ IVPO kit) (see note)
3 02-4543 1/8" NPT x ¼" JIC Adaptor (supplied w/ IVPO kit)
4 €02-1359 ¼" Tube Tee (must be ordered separately)
5 C02-1356 ¼" Male JIC x " Male Tube Adaptor (must be ordered separately)
6 02-12695 ¼" Tube x ¼" JIC Adaptor (must be ordered separately)
7 02-12696 ¼" Tube Elbow-90° (must be ordered separately)
8 02-12697 ¼" Tube Coupler (not shown) (must be ordered separately)
Note: The Actuation Hose required to connect the 1st container w/ /VO to the Actuation Tubing must be ordered separately.
4 of 6
F ike C o n tro l P anel
Distance will
vary depending
¼" x 0.035 wall on container
IRM Assembly Stainless Steel size; cut "
Tubing tubing to flt.
. •.
(p/n 10-2748)
2(see note)
eoiihi
$ 5 % 5
Adaptor
7
Nipple wl Discharge
¼"NPT Pressure Switch
2
(p/n 02-12534) 2
,-·-
%_J '
----➔~
,-- IVPO
I
~ IVPO
1
t 3 $ 3
AN AN
4' . ----+
sd '
J
0 ---
o
[ -s# t
'
The illustration above shows the items required to make the proper connection between the Container equipped w/ an IVO and the
Container(s) equipped w/ an IVPO. The maximum length of pneumatic actuation line (including Hoses) can not exceed 50 ft. (15.2 m)
and up to 6 containers equipped w/ an IVPO.
First remove the¼" NPT Plug from Adaptor Nipple, then install Actuation System as shown above. Secure Actuation tubing to a solid
surface. Anchoring into plaster, sheetrock wall or any other facing material is NOT acceptable.
The Discharge Pressure Switch (p/n 02-12534) is required and is wired to the manual release contact in SHP PRO or to a monitor module in
Cheetah Xi or Xi 50.
For additional information regarding the installation and resetting of the IVPO, refer to the IVPO Data Sheet IV.1.10.01
5 of 6
RESET INSTRUCTIONS
Remove IVO from Impulse Valve by removing Retaining Clip.
Remove Safety Pin and pull the Manual Strike Button knob until it resets (clicks into place).
Pin Extended
(IVO -- Fired Position)
--> Pull Knob
Insert IVO into Reset Tool and secure with Retaining Clip.
Reset Tool
~- --==-~~._
'.-- ] Retaining Clip
Push Reset Tool button (firmly) against a hard surface until IVO Pin resets (clicks into place).
Reset Tool
Hard Surface
Retaining Clip
Safety Pin
Insert and secure the Safety Pin, remove Retaining Clip, IVO is reset and ready to be installed on Impulse Valve.
Important Note: Check /VO to ensure device is armed before inserting on Impulse Valve.
IVO
No Pin Exposed
(IVO -- Armed Position) b
.4

Form No. IV.1.09.01-1, August 2012. Specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Fike DATA SHEET
I IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR SUPERVISOR
(IvoS)]
DESCRIPTION
The Impulse Valve Operator Supervisor (IVOS) is used to monitor the presence
of the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO). When installed between the Impulse
Valve on the container and the IVO, this supervises the position of the
actuation device; when the IVO is removed from the container this will cause a
"trouble" at the system control panel.
This can also be used to monitor the position of the Impulse Valve
Pneumatic
Operator (IVPO).
SPECIFCATIONS- IMPULSE VAVLE OPERATOR SUPERVISOR (IVOS)
Item Description
Part Number 02-14263
Switch Normally Closed (Black)/ Normally Open Contacts

(White)/ Common (Red)
Conduit 0.25"ID SST Flexible Conduit 34.75" lg. with 1/2" Knockout
Connector
Wire Leads 22 AWG, 44" lg.
Temperature Range 32°F to 130F (0C to 54.4°C)
Listings & Approvals UL/ ULC Listed & FM Approved

Impulse Valve
Operator
Supervisor
Impulse Valve
INSTALLATION (IVOS)
Actuator Port
After the electrical / control system has been checked out and no trouble/ ground
faults are present; proceed with the Actuation System installation.
NOTE: This should be the last items completed before the system is placed
into operation.
IMPORTANT NOTES: Check to ensure IVO is armed (Firing Pin retracted) and Safety
Pin is place before installing to the Impulse Valve on the container.
Install the wire leads from the IVOS to the control unit. (Refer to typical wiring n
diagrams for details)
Install lVO; remove Retaining Clip and Plastic Plug from Impulse Valve Actuation Port. Impulse Valve
Operator ( IVO)
Insert IVO into Impulse Valve Actuation Port and insert IVOS Retaining Clip.
The container is "NOW ARMED".
Form No. C.1.79.01-1

704 SW 10th Street, P.O. Box 610, Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610
U.S.A. Phone: (816) 229-3405 • www.fike.com
I TYPICAL WIRING DETAIL FOR SHP PRO TO IVOS I
=..
(See SHP Pro Control Unit manual for specific wiring requirements)
TERMINAL BLOCK WITH

NOTCHED CLAMPING
l
INSTALLED IN JUNCTION BOX
l . s a
I
WIRING TO
NEXT DEVICE
s]
SHP PRO PANEL
SWITCH WIRE LEADS

IN FLEX CONDUIT
[ NO «L NO •
NOTE:
IVOS CONTACTS SHOWN
TRANSFER UNDER RED RED
PRESSURE
BLACK D NC •L BLAC..K......,[ NC •
IVOS ACTUATOR
SUPERVISOR PRESSURE SWITCH
NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT WIRING
TYPICAL WIRING DETAIL FOR MONITOR MODULE TO IVOS

(See Cheetah Xi Control Unit manual for specific wiring requirements)
JUNCTION BOX
TERMINAL BLOCK WITH

ADDRE SSABLE
NOTCHED CLAMPING PLATE
MONITOR MODULE
INSTALLED IN JUNCTION BOX
SLCOUT
SLCIN
NOTE: NORMALLY OP Copyright ©

IVOS CONTACTS CONTACT W Fike
SHOWN TRANSFER Corporation All
Rights
UNDER PRESSURE
Reserved.
Form No. C.1.79.01-1, March, 2016. Specifications are subject changes without notice.
BLACK D• NC
IVOS OR PRESSURE SWITCH
2 of 2
Fike DATA SHEET
I DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH I Discharge Pressure
Switch
DESCRIPTION
Discharge Pressure Switch (DPS) is used to provide a positive pneumatic confirmation to the control system
that the Fike Fire Suppression system has been discharged.
When a system is discharged manually (by Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) with Strike Button), the discharge
pressure switch is required to provide the input to the control system needed to activate various audio/
visual warning devices and auxiliary relays.
The switch is operated pneumatically using the agent pressure in the discharge piping network.
SPECIFICATIONS
I'Temperature
Part Number: 02-12534 l
(0toL54.4° C) imke 3to130±
Enclosure Classification: NEMA 4
Contact Rating: Single pole, double throw; Container w/ Impulse
Valve
5 amps resistive,
3 amps inductive@ 30VDC
(can be wired for normally open or normally closed operation)
Body Material: Aluminum with irridite finish
Weight: 6.5 ounces APPROVALS:
Pressure Connection: 1/4" NPT (6 mm)
DPS Length (approx): 4 1/8" (105 mm) Long (including both connectors) • UL Listed
Electrical Connection: 1/2" NPT (15 mm) • ULC Listed
Wire Leads: (3) 18 gauge 20" (508 mm)long Violet (Common), Blue (N.O.), Black • FM Approved
Pressure Setting: (N.C.)
40 psig (3 bar) (Increasing)
INSTALLATION
Discharge Pressure Switch is installed in the 1/4" NPT (female threads) port machined into the Adapter
Nipple as shown in the illustration below. (see Figure 1)
Step 1: Remove rubber cap and apply Teflon Tape to the male threads of the Discharge Pressure
@
Step 2: Switch. Remove¼" pipe plug from Adapter Nipple. LISTED
Step 3: Thread Discharge Pressure Switch into¼" NPT port on Adaptor Nipple (Wrench tight).
Discharge
<@>
APPROVED
Pressure Switch
Adapter Nipple
w/ 1/4" female threads
Grooved Coupling
Discharge Outlet
FIGURE 1
Form No. IV.1.12.01-1
WIRING DIAGRAM
Following is a typical wiring diagram showing how the discharge pressure switch is wired to the manual release input of the Fike SHP PRO®
control panel. (see Figure 2) For control panel wiring details, refer to the SHP PRO manual P/N 06-297
lnput=~--~- -
Blue
- - -
~l
Resistor
, I "
Manual Release
FIGURE
2 End of Line
Discharge Pressure Switch

Normally Open Contacts
(closes when pressure applied)
When the Cheetah® Xi or Xi 50 is used, the switch can connect to a monitor module (MM) programmed for latching manual release.
For control panel wiring details, refer to the Cheetah Xi manual P/N 06-356 or Cheetah Xi 50 manual P/N 06-369.
Fike DATA SHEET
I LOW PRESSURE SWITCH I

Low Pressure Switch
DESCRIPTION
Fike offers an optional Low Pressure Switch (LPS) for the purpose of
continuously monitoring the container pressure for a low-pressure condition.
If the pressure inside the container drops below 288 psig (1986 kPa), the switch
contacts will transfer and invoke a "supervisory" indication on the control panel.
The LPS is an optional item for Impulse Valve containers. It may be ordered along with
a configured Impulse Valve container or as a separate item. FIGURE 1
The design of the Impulse Valve allows a LPS to be installed on a fully

pressurized container without loss of agent or pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS:
I Part Number: 02-12533 I • UL Listed
• ULC Listed
Temperature Limits: 32 0 130F (0 to 54.4"c) • FM Approved
Enclosure Classification: NEMA4
Contact Rating: Single pole, double throw; 5 amps resistive,
3 amps inductive@ 30VDC
(can be wired for normally open or normally closed
Body Material: operation) Aluminum with irridite finish
@ @
Weight: 6.5 ounces
Pressure Connection: M10 x 1-6G
Electrical Connection: 1/2" NPT (15 mm)
LPS Length (approx): 43/8" (111 mm) long (including both connectors)
Wire Leads: (3) 18 gauge x 4.0 ft. (1.2m) long Violet (common), Blue (N.0.), Black LISTED
Pressure Setting: (N.C.)
<@>
288 psig (20 bar) (decreasing)
INSTALLATION
The LPS is an optional item and must be ordered separately. This device can be installed in the Fill Port on a APPROVED
container that is charged by using the following steps:
Step 1: Prior to Assembly; lubricate the LPS O-Ring with Molycoat 55 or equal. Use care not to get
lubricant into pressure port.
Notes: DO NOT apply Teflon Tope to LPS threads.
DO NOT cross thread the LPS during installation.
Step 2: Remove and retain Plug from Fill Port. (see Figure 1)
Step 3: Remove rubber cap and screw in the LPS (Hand Tight) until the switch bottoms out. Screwing
the switch in to this point will open an internal check valve and applies pressure the switch.
Note: "NO TOOLS" ore required to install LPS.
Step 4: Leak check around the pressure gauge port using Snoop leak test fluid or equivalent.
If a leak is detected; remove the LPS from the fill port and remove the lubricant and
contaminants from the O-Ring, threads and valve port using isopropyl alcohol and a soft clean
cloth.
Lubricate the O-Ring with Molycoat 55 or equal and reinstall. Leak test around the fill port.
If a leak is detected; remove the LPS from the fill port, remove the O-Ring, install a new O-Ring,
lubricate the O-ring with Molycoat 55 or equal, install the LPS in the fill port, and leak test
around the fill port.
Note: When installing conduct connector to LPS secure Hand Tight". Over tightening may
cause damage to the LPS or to the Impulse valve fill port threads.
Form No. IV.1.13.01-1
WIRING DIAGRAM -- LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
The LPS should be wired into a supervised circuit in the control panel used to provide a supervisory signal if the container pressure
drops below 288 psig (1986 kPa). The switch is wired as a normally closed contact (open under pressure). (see Figure 2)
Note: Refer to the Installation, Operation & Maintenance for the control panel being used for specific wiring criteria.
End of Line
Resistor
Low Pressure Switch

Normally Closed
Contacts (open under
pressure) (Typical 3)
FIGURE 2

Fike DATA SHEET
I LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR (Lli) I APPROVALS:

• UL Listed
• ULC Listed
DESCRIPTION • FM Approved
The Liquid Level Indicator (LU) provides a means of verifying the weight of agent in a container without
having to remove the container and weigh it on a calibrated scale.
This device enables the inspector to determine the weight of agent with the container safely secured in its
@
installed position.
LLi's are furnished on the 100, 150, 215, 375, 650 and 1000 lb. (44, 61, 88, 153, 267 and 423 L) containers.
Refer to the following Liquid Level Indicator Manuals for additional information concerning its installation
and use:
LISTED
• P/N 06-548 LLi Manual for ECARO-25 containers
• P/N 06-549 LLi Manual for FM-200 containers
Warning: The Liquid Level Indicator (LU} MUST be installed while the Container is EMPTY. <@>
APPROVED
Container Size lb. (L) Lli P/N

100 (44) 70-1353-27
150 (61) 70-1353-14
215 (88) 70-1353-18
375 (153) 70-1353-27

650 (267) 70-1353-38
1000 (423) 70-1353-49
Form No. IV.1.20.01
{This page is left blank intentionally)

Form No. IV.1.20.01, August 2012. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fike
60000
0
c
FIKE ENGINEERED NOZZLES FOR FM-200® CLEAN AGENT SYSTEMS
FM-200 is also known by its ASHRAE designation HFC-227ea g
DESCRIPTION
The function of the Fike Engineered Discharge Nozzle in a fire extinguishing system
is to distribute the Clean Agent in a uniform, predetermined pattern and concentration.
A
The nozzles are designed to complete the discharge of Clean Agent in 10 seconds or
less when installed within the design limitations of the Fike Design, Installation and
Maintenance Manual, P /N 06-202 or 06-215 and the Fike Flow Calculation computer
program.
Fike Engineered Discharge Nozzles are available in sizes of 3/8" (10mm) through 2
(50mm). Each nozzle is available in 180 and 360 degree discharge patterns.
The Discharge Nozzle size refers to the size of Schedule 40 or 80 steel pipe to which it
can be connected. The nozzle discharge orifices are drilled perpendicular to the center
line of the threads. The nozzles are mounted to allow the agent to be discharged on a APPROVALS
horizontal axis.
• UL Listed - Ex4623
• ULC Listed - CEx1136
Nozzle orifices are available in a wide range of sizes to provide accurate Clean Agent
• FM Approved - 0Y4A8.AF
flow results. All nozzles have been tested for their ability to discharge the Clean Agent
under extreme conditions.
Nozzle orifice drilling must be done at the Fike factory, or other UL listed nozzle drill station, only after "As-Built"
calculations of the installed piping system(s) have been performed, using the Fike Flow Calculation computer program.
The Fike Discharge Nozzle used shall be Factory Mutual (FM) approved and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed.
ARCHITECT AND ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS

The nozzle used to disperse Clean Agent shall be a Fike Series 80. The nozzle shall be available in 3/8" (10mm) thru
2 (50mm) sizes. Each size shall be available in both 180 and 360 degree dispersion patterns. The nozzle used shall
have pipe threads that correspond to the nozzle size. All nozzles shall have an orifice size determined by a UL listed
and FM approved flow calculation program. All nozzle orifice drilling shall be performed by the manufacturer or a UL
listed nozzle drilling facility.
Form No. C.1.08.01-4
704 S. 10th Street · P.O. Box 610 · Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. · (816) 229-3405 (816) 229-4615 · www.fike.com
NOZZLE SIZE AND AREA COVERA GE
180° NOZZLE 360° NOZZLE
Nozzle Area Coverage
"R" Ceiling Height

Nozzle Type
Dimension Range
1.0 to
180 Degree 45-8" (13.92) 16.0
(0.3 to
4.9)
1.0 to
360 Degree 29' - 8" (9.04) 16.0
(0.3 to
4.9)
NOZZLE SIZE 180° NOZZLE 360° NOZZLE

(NPT) (mm) PART NUMBER PART
NUMBER
3/8° (10) 80-060 80-052
1/2° (15) 80-061 80-053
3/4" (20) 80-062 80-054
1" (25) 80-063 80-055
1 1/4" (32) 80-064 80-
056
1 1 /2" (40) 80-065 80-057
2 (50) 80-066 80-058
NOTES:
a. The maximum allowable area of coverage includes any area within the radius distance from the nozzle ("R dimension)
to the most extreme wall or corner.
b. Nozzles should be located on center line of hazard area.
c. When working with ceiling heights exceeding the values tabulated above, the hazard volume must be broken down into
vertically stacked hazard volumes, with heights less than the maximums shown in the table. It is imperative that
unusual applications of this nature be handled by experienced design engineers and, in most cases, operational tests
should be performed before the system is put into service.
d. Dimensions and nozzle data shown are taken from the UL listed and FM approved Design, Installation & Maintenance
Manual - P/N 06-202 or 06-215.
e. 180 and 360 degree nozzles may be placed a maximum of 1 foot (30.5cm) down from the ceiling, and 180 degree nozzles
may be placed a maximum of 1 foot (30.5cm) from the wall.
f. Nozzle threading is NPT.
Fik Copyright© Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved.

DuPont and FM-200 are trademarks or registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont de Nemours and
Company. Form No. C.1.08.01-4 August, 2008 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. 2 ELECTRICAL DEVICES
64
Qatar Factory
FM200 System
Electrical Devices
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
Fike DATA SHEET
I SHP PRO® I
DESCRIPTION
..----------,
The Fike SHP PRO, {P/N 10-063) is a Conventional Control system designed to provide a sophisticated,
reliable conven 1ona e ection system for use with clean agent extinguishing, sprinkler pre-
action/deluge, watermist, waterflow alarm and fire alarm systems. It is a microprocessor based system
which can be easily configured for a wide range of suppression applications.
The SHP PRO is designed for use with Fike Clean Agent Fire Suppressant, CO,, or sprinkler (pre-action/
deluge) suppression systems. The main controller contains all electronics required for a complete
detection and control system suitable for most applications. Optional modules, which plug into the main
circuit board, are available to add increased functionality to the system.
The SHP PRO provides 10 Status LEDs (AC Normal, Alarm, PreDischarge, Release, Supervisory, Trouble,
Panel Silenced, Abort, Release Disabled, Ground Fault) for instant feedback. A diagnostic LED display is
provided to help troubleshoot any potential field problems, provide current status and retain stored events.
A Reset and Silence switch is provided to allow control of the system outputs and operation.
The SHP PRO can be configured for either one or two conventional detection circuits. The detection
circuits can be configured for sequential detection, cross zone or single detector release. APPROVALS:
• UL Listed - 52203
Depending on the configuration selected, the SHP PRO also provides up to three initiating circuits to • FM Approved - 3017159
monitor contact devices (Abort, Manual Release, Waterflow or Supervisory switches). Four different abort • CSFM 7165-0900: 135
types are available including a special NYC option. All five initiating circuits can be converted to Class A • City of New York•
operation via the SHP PRO Class A Input Module, P/N 10-2450. All SHP PRO initiating circuits are inherently 461-04-E
power limited. A twelve position dip switch is used to set all options. • State of CA Seismic •
OSP-0077-10
Three notification appliance circuits, rated for 2 amps @ 24 VDC are available. Depending on the • Hong Kong 206/0877 VII
configuration, each circuit will provide distinct signaling for Alarm, PreDischarge, or Release conditions.
Separate Agent Release and Solenoid circuits are provided to operate the suppression system. A
dedicated Disable switch is provided for release and audible outputs. All output circuits, including
solenoid and agent release circuits, are power limited.
The SHP PRO provides dedicated alarm, trouble and supervisory SPDT contacts for annunciation and
control. If additional outputs are required, up to two CRM4 Relay Modules can be added. (P/N 10-2204)
<@>
APPROVED
The SHP PRO is available in multiple hardware configurations, depending on the input power source
{120 or 240 VAC), enclosure color (Gray or Red), and mode of operation {Clean Agent, Clean
Agent/Sprinkler, Sprinkler, Watermist, Solenoid Releasing). The system comes equipped with a 4.0
amp@ 24 VDC power source.
The system has been designed to comply with the following standards:
• NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide
• NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems
• NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems
• NFPA 16 Foam-water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems
• NFPA 70 National Electric Code
• NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
• NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
Form No. D.1.07.01-7
FEATURES
• Suitable for multiple types of Suppression: Clean Agent, Carbon Dioxide, Pre-Action Sprinkler/Deluge, and Watermist Systems
• Microprocessor based with hardware and software integration designed to guarantee reliability
• Five Class B, Style B initiating circuits
• Cross zone or sequential detection, manual release, abort, water flow, and supervisory initiating circuits
• Three Class B, Style V notification appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24VDC
• Dedicated release circuits compatible with agent release or solenoid actuation
• Optional Class A modules for notification appliances/releasing circuits and initiating circuits
• Alpha-numeric LED display for status and troubleshooting
• Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
• Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
• Integral 4.0 amp power supply
• Small surface or flush mount enclosure with removable door
• Approved for releasing device service and sprinkler supervisory
• Built-in Gentex and System Sensor synch protocol
• Steel enclosure 21" x 14.35" x4"
• Enclosure equipped with .SO" wide lip for flush mounting
SHP PRO WIRING DIAGRAM COMPONENTS

• 10-063-X-X-X
• 10-063-X-X-X
ABC
A: 1-Clean Agent/All Modes
2-Sprinkler only
B: R-Red
G-Gray
C: 1-120 VAC
2- 240 VAC
• 10-2452-1 PCB Assy, SHP PRO,
Clean Agent, All Modes
@ • 10-2452-2 PCB Assy, SHP PRO,
Sprinkler Only
THESERELAYSARPROVIDDE
FOR CusTOMER us
• 10-2450 Class A Input Module
• 10-2448 Class A Output Module
#ORTrAct T
8ultDING+»MEAUAR'N$YSTE
we ADCONDITTO
BEPROVIDED
ANDNSALLA0
8YCUSTOMER • 10-2204 CRM4 Relay Module
2AS @ VDC
0$AP$@2$0AC • 10-2190-2 Battery Assembly
• (Qty. 2), 18AH, w/ wiring assembly
NE SE RELA Y S AR E PR OVIDE D F OR
CsroR USE FOR
AC$TOON
bAng R CONTROL ETC / AND
EZZZZE:; + <
.ZEE
l?
RU A Y 4 ABORT
On.ow C 0
NOTES
t. ALL w ts guPESED@XCET RELAY AND AUX +24uT
2 DETECTOR CIRCUITS HAVE COUNTINGIONE CAPABILITY
$ Ccunrs AE POwR LTD xCeT Pt CCunTS
4u9ING d 0MM 8AS£$ OR CONTACT CLOSUREDEVICES
ON peTECTt OR2 CL T APO#RATE 0 OM AUER
$£ATH GROUND CONNECTIONS " A9PROVIDED OM$ELD
CHASSIS GROUND (EAR1CONNTON TERINATONS SILDED CABLES AREUSED
SALL B MADpRCTLY TO STAN0O

Form No. D.1.07.01-7, June 2011. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SOC-24V (P/N 63-1307) AND SOC-24VN Applications
[(P/N 63-1308)CONVENTIONAL] The SOC-24V and SOC-24VN are a reliable, high quality
I PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS I Photoelectric Smoke Detectors. They can be used in
all open areas where Photoelectric Smoke Detectors are
required, including in-duct applications. The computer•
designed smoke chamber makes the SOC-24V and
SOC-
24VN well suited for detecting smoldering fires as well
as
¢ fast-flaming fires .
e NS-4 Series, NS-6 Series, HSC-4R or HSC-R Style bases

may
be used with the SOC-24V and SOC-24VN.
Operation
Ambient Temperature 32F to 120°F
(0C to 49C)
Standard Color & Case Material Bone PC/ABS Blend
Features Sensitivity Test Feature Automatic Sensitivity
window verification test
• Computer-designed non-directional smoke
chamber Mounting Refer to NS Conventional
Detector Base Data Sheet
• 360° view of detector status
LED
• Low profile, 2" high (with
base)
• 2 or 4 wire base compatibility, relay bases
available
• Highly stable operation, RF/Transient
protection
• Low standby current, 59A at
24VDC
• One built-in power/sensitivity supervision/alarm
LED
• Automatic Sensitivity window verification function
meets outlined requirements in NFPA 72, Chapter 2 & 7,
Inspection, Testing and Maintenance.
• Magnetic Test Feature, SOC-24V
only
I Specifications I
Light Source GaAIAs Infrared
Emitting
Diode Nominal
Rated Voltage 12 or 24 VDC Working
Voltage 8- 35.0 VDC Maximum
Voltage 42 VDC Supervisory
Current 59A @ 24 VDC
Surge Current 160µA max. @
24VDC Alarm Current lS0mA
max. @24 VDC Air Velocity Range 0-
4000 fpm
Maximum Humidity 95% RH Non-
Condensing
The SOC-24V and SOC-24VN photoelectric smoke Fire Judgement signals are processed and compared to a
detectors utilize one bicol-ored LED for indication of reference level, and when five consecutive
status. In a normal standby condi-tion the LED flash signals exceeding the reference level are received
Green every 3 seconds. When the detector senses that its within a specified period of time, the time delay circuit
sensitivity has drifted outside the UL listed sensitivity triggers the SCR switch to activate the alarm signal.
window the LED will flash Red every 3 seconds. When The status LED lights continuously during the alarm
the detector senses smoke and goes into alarm the period.
status LED will latch on Red.
Product Listings
The detector utilizes an infrared LED light source and
silicon photodiode receiving element in the smoke SIGNALING
chamber. In a normal standby condition, the receiving

element receives no light from the pulsing LED light
source. In the event of a fire, smoke enters the detector
®
LISTED
smoke chamber and light is reflected from the smoke For exact certification listings for each model, please reference the
respective agency Web site.
particles to the receiving element. The light received
is converted into an electronic signal.
This document is not to be used for installation purposes and is subject to Fike's full disclaimer Page 1 of 2
at http://www.fike.com/disclaimer.
Form No. X.XX.XX-X
Fike reserves the right to change product designs or specifications without obligation and without further notice.
Month, Year
Engineering Specifications The sensitivity of the detector shall be monitored
automatically and cont inuously to verify that it
The contractor shall furnish and install where indicated is operating within the listed sensitivity range.
on the plans, Fike Model SOC-24V or SOC-24VN
photoelectric smoke detectors, P/N 63-1307 or 63- To facilitate installation, the detector shall be
1308. The combination detector head and twist-lock non• polarized. Voltage and RF transient suppression
base shall be UL listed compatible with a UL listed fire techniques shall be employed to minimize false alarm
alarm panel. The base shall permit direct interchange potential. Auxiliary SPDT relays shall be installed
with SOC-24V and SOC-24VN photoelectric smoke where indicated.
detectors. The base shall be appropriate twistlock
base NS-4 Series, NS-6 Series, HSC-4R, or HSC-R. In SOC-24V Sensitivity Test
the event of partial or complete retrofit, the SOC-24V Feature
and SOC-24VN maybe used in conjunction with, or as a
The SOC-24V Photoelectric Smoke Detector has a built-
replacement for, Hochiki America detectors (SLR-24V,
in automatic sensitivity test feature.
SLR-24VN, SLK-24 and the SLR-24H) on most HSB and HSC
base applications. 1. In normal condition, the status LED flashes
green.
The smoke detector shall have one flashing status LED 2. When the sensitivity drifts outside of its sensitivity
for visual supervision. When the detector is in limits, the status LED flashes red.
standby condition the LED will flash Green. When the
3. In the alarm state, the status LED is red
detector is outside the UL listed sensitivity window the
continuously.
LED will flash Red. When the detector is actuated, the
flashing LED will latch on Red. The detector may be 4. When the sensitivity drifts outside of its sensitivity
reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. The limits and the status LED flashes red, the device needs
sensitivity of the detector to be cleaned or returned to the factory for cleaning
shall be capable of being or calibration. Refer to HA Technical Bulletin HA-
measured. 97 for
cleaning information.
2-WIRE OPERATION
uL LsrEo ()
CONTRO LSTED
L END OF LINE
DEVICE
PANEL
WIRING TERMINAL FOR THE NS4

AND N 6 ARE IDENTICAL
- BASES w1TH THE "w SUFFIX

AR E WH ITE IN C OLO R
Annunciation device must be current limited to
[20 mA @ 24VDC Maximum. Not limiting
current [could result in damage to the detector
or
cause a condition
(+)
2-WIRE RELAY OPERATION
UL LISTED
CONTROL LISTED
END OF LINE
PANEL DEVICE
(-)
AND WIRE DASE
RELAYS SHOWN WITH
POWER OFF
HSC-- RELAY SERIES
4- WIRE OPERATION
LISTED END
OE LINE
DEVICE
(-)
LISTED EN
Or LINE
RELAY
HA-EOLR-224
Page 2 of 2 Visit www.fike.com to contact us or to download the latest version of this document.
Form No. X.XX.XX-X © Copyright 2017, Fike Corporation. All rights reserved.
Month, Year Fike is an ISO 9001 Certified Company.
Fike DATA
SHEET
I MANUAL RELEASE SWITCH I
DESCRIPTION
The manual release switch assembly, P/N 10-1638,consists of a latching, push button switch with keyed
reset, normally-open contact block, an stain ess steel switch plate with adhesive label. The assembly can
be recessed or surface mounted using a standard two-gang masonry box, minimum 2.5" (63.5 mm) deep
(RACO
691), or equivalent. Masonry box not included.
FEATURES
• Stackable, screw-terminal, contact blocks Manual Release Switch
• Compatible with Fike suppression control panels
• Surface or flush mount
• Dual action activation
• Components mounted on a stainless steel face plate APPROVALS:
• NFPA 72 initiating device
• UL-3217
• FM
APPLICATIONS • CSFM -- 6760-0900:0103
The manual release switch assembly is used to manually initiate the release of the suppression system,
overriding any active abort switch inputs. To operate the switch, the operator must first pull the spring
safety clip (breaking the seal), and then press the push button. The switch will remain engaged until
<@>
released by unlocking the active switch with a key. This provides positive indication of switch activation.
Control panel operation, after manual release switch operation, varies depending upon panel programming.
Refer to the associated control unit manual for detailed description of available manual release operating
modes. APPROVED
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.45 lb (204 grams)
Operating Temperature: 0° to 49C(32° to 120°F)
Wire Size: Min. 1 x 22 AWG, Max. 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
Fike P/N Description

10-1422 Manual Release Switch Assembly
02-2150 Extra Contact Block, N.O.
02-3027 Dummy Contact Block

02-2213 Security Tie (beaded cable)
02-2270 Safety Clip
02-2139 Manual Release Adhesive Label

10-104 Stainless Steel Face Plate w/ mounting screws
10-1419 Stainless Steel plate (1)
02-2316 Mounting screws (4 required)

02-4192 Replacement Key, #O
02-2153 2 Gang Masonry Box, RACO 691
Form No. P.1.189.01

MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
3.52 2.95 4.50

[89.31mm] [74.89mm] [114.30mm]
1.82
2.50 1.93
[49.11mm] [46.25mm]
[63.50mm]
1.76
[44.71mm]
G---- MANUAL
3.28
[83.19mm]
( Q----
1
4.50
[114.30mm]
L _ 0
SIDE VIEW W/ ELECTRICAL BOX SIDE VIEW W/O ELECTRICAL FRONT VIEW
BOX
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
---7
flt
MANUAL RELEASE
CLASS A INPUT I INTERNAL EOL
TERMINALS (PANEL I RESISTOR
OR MODULE)
ft]flu
---::1
Lt)' fl(ht
I
MANUAL RELEASE EOL MANUAL RELEASE I
INPUT TERMINALS I RESISTO INPUT TERMINALS I
(PANEL OR MODULE) (PANEL OR MODULE)
I R
I
"
MANUAL f t)th MANUAL

RELEASE
___ _ RELEASE
SWITCH SWITCH
J
NFPA 72 CLASS B NFPA 72 CLASS A WIRING
WIRING
SEE CONTROL UNIT MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC WIRING REQUIREMENTS.
Copyright© Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved. 2 of 2

Form No. P.1.189.01, February 2014. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fike DATA
SHEET
I ABORT SWITCH I
DESCRIPTION
The abort switch assembly,/P/N10-1639/consists of a momentary-contact, push button switch, normally•
open contact block, normally-closed contact block, and stainless steel switch plate with adhesive label. The
assembly can be recessed or surface mounted using a standard two-gang masonry box, minimum 2.5"
(63.5 mm) deep (RACO 691), or equivalent. Masonry box not included.
FEATURES
• Stackable, screw-terminal, contact blocks Abort Switch
• Compatible with Fike suppression control panels
• Surface or flush mount
• Components mounted on a stainless steel face plate
• NFPA 72 initiating device APPROVALS:
• UL-3217
APPLICATIONS • FM
• CSFM - 6760-0900:0103
The abort switch assembly is used to momentarily interrupt the release circuit signal when the control
panel is in the alarm condition. As long as the push button is held in, the suppression system will not
release unless it is overridden by a manual release input. Upon release of the abort push button, the
release circuit is activated, unless the control panel has been reset to the non-alarm condition.
Operation of the control unit during abort activation varies depending upon panel programming. Refer to
the associated control unit manual for detailed description of available abort operating modes (types). <@>
APPROVED
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.45 lb (204 grams)
Operating Temperature: 0° to 49C(32° to 120°F)
Wire Size: Min. 1 x 22 AWG, Max. 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
Fike P/N Description
10-1430 Abort Switch Assembly

02-2130 Extra Contact Block, N.C.
02-2150 Extra Contact Block, N.O.
02-2137 Abort Adhesive Label
10-104 Stainless Steel Face Plate w/ mounting screws
10-1419 Stainless Steel Face Plate (1)
02-2316 Mounting Screws (4 required)

02-2153 Back Box, 4 x 4, 2 gang, RACO 691
Form No. P.1.190.01

MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
3.44
•
2.87 4.50
[87.28mm] [72.86mm [114.30mm]
1.93 1.82
2.50 [49.11mm] [46.25mm]
[63.50mm]
1.76
[44.68mm]
G---- l
e
3.28
[83.19mm]
1
4.50
[114.30mm]
-- 0
SIDE VIEW W/ ELECTRICAL BOX SIDE VIEW WIO ELECTRICAL BOX FRONT VIEW
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

ABORT SWITCH
,---7
AB-ORT INP~~:r~c----+~-+-_J+I -~~
EOL TERMINALS I
---=7
ABORT CLASS(~"->--I----------
RESISTOR
(PANEL OR MODULE) I ~
(+) .f-'------------~
__ _ _ _J INPUT TERMINALS I INTERNAL
EOL (PANEL OR MODULE) I
NFPA 72 CLASS B, SERIES WIRING RESISTOR
ABORT SWITCH fl(hl,
()6'[_1 ABORT SWITCH
:/
(-)6 [
ABORT INPUT ABORT INPUT I ~ I
TERMINALS I I NO I
EOL TERMINALS I NO I
(PANEL OR MODULE) RESISTOR (PANEL OR MODULE) I I
I I I
____ J
ff}fl
fl(h
NFPA 72 CLASS B, PARALLEL WIRING NFPA 72 CLASS A
WIRING
SEE CONTROL UNIT MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC WIRING

REQUIREMENTS.
Copyright© Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved. 2 of 2
Form No. P.1.190.01, February 2014. Specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Fike 6000¢
I BELLS I
DESCRIPTION
Fike's motor bells provide a better engineered motor bell for fire and life
safety alarm systems. A number of improvements have been built into the
bell line, including higher dBA, low current draw, built-in trimplate for
semi-flush mounting, low frequency aluminum shells, and low RFI noise.
The motor is a durable, high torque, permanent magnet motor selected for
its high performance and long life.
FEATURES
UL Listed for Fire Protective Service
High sound output with low current draw
Low frequency aluminum shells for better audibility through walls,
floors, and other structures
Both 6 and 10" shell sized for 24 VDC model
Integral RFI suppression to minimize induced noise on the alarm lines
Built-in trimplate makes semi-flush mounting simpler and less expensive
Screw terminals permit fast in-out field wiring of 12 to 18 AWG wire
Polarized for DC supervision of alarm lines
Operate on filtered or unfiltered DC
Mount to a Standard 4 square backbox
Manufacture I nput Voltag e dBA@ 10
Fike P/N Shell Size Input Current Appro
P/N (VDC) Feet
I 20-110 MB-G6-24-R 6" 24 0.030 92 I UL, C
MEA,
20-111 MB-G10-24-R 10" 24 0.030 92 ULC,
Notes:
1. Built-in trim plate eliminates need for SFP plate
2. Typical dBA at 10 ft. is measured in an anechoic chamber
3. 24 VDC models are U.L. rated for 18.0 to 31.0 VDC. All DC models can be used with filtered and unfiltered
(full wave rectified) voltage.
WIRING DIAGRAM
+
From To next signal
Preceding Bell + t or E.O.L.
or F.A.C.P.
Form No. P.1.09.01-2

704 S. 10th Street · P.O. Box 610 · Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. · (816) 229-3405 · (816) 229-4615 · www.fike.com
ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS SPECIFICATIONS
The alarm signals shall be Fike vibrating Motor Bells or approved egual. They shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective
Service. Shells shall be aluminum in 6" (or 10) diameter. Sound output at 10 feet shall be 92 dBA. The bells shall
incorporate a permanent magnet motor and suppression to minimize RFI. They shall include a built-in trimplate for
semi-flush mounting to standard 4" sguare backboxes, or surface mounting backbox.
Fike products must be used within their published specifications and must be PROPERLY specified, applied, installed,
operated, maintained and operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installation
and at least twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state, and federal codes, regulations and laws.
Specifications, application, installation, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for
proper operation in accordance with all of the latest National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Underwriters'
Laboratories UUL), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), local state,
county, province, district, federal and other applicable building and fire standards, guidelines, regulations, laws and codes
including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the reguirements of the local authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ).
Fl k Copyright© Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved.

Form No. P.1.09.01-2 August, 2007 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
--
COOP E R Notification
I Series MT and MT Strobe Multitone Electronic Appliances!
( " r t
b fR ~
I
-
E
i
c 0
SERIES MT STROBE MT4-115-WH SERIES MT-12/24

Description Features:
: Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, UL Standard
The Wheelock Series MT and MT Strobe Multitone electronic 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), New York City
appliances offer a choice of eight (8) nationally and (MEA), Factory Mutual (FM) and Chicago (BFP)
internationally See approvals by model in Specifications and
recognized alerting sounds: Horn, Bell, March Time Horn, Code- Ordering Information
3
Designed to meet or exceed
Tone, Code-3 Horn, Slow Whoop, Siren or Hi/Lo Tone. The ADA/NFPA/UFC/ANSI Standards and Accessibility
Code-3 Horn and tone patterns are engineered to comply with Guidelines
NFPA/ANSI Temporal Pattern specifications without
requiring additional equipment. With MT and MT Strobe Complies with OSHA 29, Part 1910.165
appliances, one alarm appliance meets most of your signaling Series MT appliances have IN and OUT wiring
needs. The MT strobes can be synchronized using the terminations that accept two #12 to #18 American
Wheelock DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or Wire Gauge (AWG) wires at each terminal. Inputs
other manufacturers panel incorporating the Wheelock Patented are
Sync Protocol. polarized for compatibility with standard reverse
polarity type supervision
The MT Strobes are designed for ADA applications while
One alarm appliance with (8) eight selective signals to
meeting or exceeding the latest requirements of NFPA 72,
ANSI 117.1, UFC and UL Standard 1971 as well as meeting ADA provide superior sound penetration for various ambient
requirements concerning photosensitive epilepsy. and wall conditions with two field selectable sound
output levels
Each MT and MT Strobe appliance has two installer selective Code-3 Horn and Tone meet ANSI/NFPA temporal
sound output levels: STANDARD dBAand HIGH dBA. Non- pattern for standard emergency evacuation signaling
strobe versions provide selectable voltage capability in one unit, Audible and strobe can operate from a single NAC
12VDC or 24VDC. Strobe versions are specific for either 12VDC circuit or from separate NAC circuits with any of the (8)
or 24VDC and all models may be used with filtered or unfiltered eight audible sounds
(full-wave• rectified) input voltages. Separate input terminals are
available, shunt wires are provided to enable both tone and MT Strobe models are available with Wheelock patented
strobe to operate simultaneously from a single input. MCW Multi-Candela strobes with field selectable candela
settings at 15/30/75/11 0cd or with single candela
The Series MT Multitone Strobe appliances are UL Listed 1575cd strobes. Synchronize using the Wheelock Sync
for indoor wall mount applications under Standard 1971 for Modules or panels with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync
Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired and under Standard Protocol
464 for Audible Signaling Appliances. Selectable input voltage on non-strobe versions. Strobe
versions are factory set for either 12 or 24VDC, with
wide• Listed voltage range, filtered (DC) and FWR
No additional trimplate required for flush mounting
For Weatherproof MTWP See Data Sheet

S9004
<@>
E5946 151-92-E
APPROVED
7135-0785:118 (MT4)
7125-0785:155 (MT)
7125-0758:156 (MTWP)
NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol A . All warn ings are printed in bold capital letters .
A WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS,
CAUTIONS AND
WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE
PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
General Notes:
• Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their "Regulated Voltage Range" (16-33v for 24VDC units and
8-17.5v for 12VDC units). Regulated Voltage Range is the newest terminology used by UL to identify the listed voltage range.
• All candela ratings represent minimum effective Multitone Strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.
• MT Strobe models are UL Standard 1971 Listed for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120F (0C to 49°C)
and maximum humidity of 93% ±2%. The MT-12/24, MTWP and MT4 models and listed for outdoor use at -31°F to 150°F (-
35°C to
66°C) and maximum humidity of 95% (See Data Sheet S9004 or Installation Instruction Sheet P84150 for more detail on MTWP).
MTWP and MT4 strobes are listed under UL 1638.
• MT Audible is UL Standard 464 Listed.
Alarm Tones
TONE ALARM TONES PATTERN DESCRIPTION
HORN BROADBAND HORN (Continuous)
BELL 1560 Hz MODULATED (0.07 sec.
ON/Repeat) MARCH TIME
HORN HORN (0.25 sec. ON/0.25 sec. OFF/Repeat
CODE-3 HORN HORN (ANSI S3.41 Temporal

Pattern) CODE-3 TONE 500 Hz (ANSI S3.41
Temporal Pattern)
SLOW WHOOP 500-1200 Hz SWEEP (4.0 sec. ON/0.5 sec. OFF/Repeat)
SIREN 600-1200 Hz SWEEP (1.0 sec.
ON/Repeat) HI/LO 1000/800 Hz (0.25 sec.
ON/Alternate)
Table 1: dBA and Current Ratings for Multitone Audible Portion
RMS Current (amps) dBA @ 10ft (UL Reverberant)
24VDC 12 voe 120VAC 24VDC 12VDC 120

HI STD
VAC HI Output STD Output HI Output STD Output
Output Output
HI STD HI STD HI STD
@24 UL @24 UL @24 UL @24 UL UL UL Output Output Output Output Output Output
voe max* voe
max* voe max* voe max* max* max*
Horn 0.074 0.108 0.033 0.044 0.145 0.176 0.023 0.034 0.050 0.042 92 87 90 77 85 82
Bell 0.040 0.053 0.018 0.024 0.077 0.095 0.014 0.020 0.041 0.039 86 80 85 69 82 75
March Time
0.067 0.104 0.033 0.038 0.109 0.142 0.023 0.034 0.050 0.040 89 84 89 74 85 79
Horn
Code-3 Horn 0.069 0.091 0.026 0.035 0.100 0.142 0.023 0.034 0.050 0.042 88 83 88 73 82 75
Code-3 Tone 0.061 0.075 0.026 0.035 0.088 0.105 0.015 0.021 0.042 0.040 85 80 84 70 79 75
Slow Whoop 0.069 0.098 0.028 0.037 0.100 0.142 0.025 0.035 0.050 0.042 90 89 89 75 85 82
Siren 0.080 0.104 0.027 0.036 0.122 0.152 0.021 0.030 0.045 0.041 89 84 89 75 85 82
HI/LO 0.044 0.057 0.020 0.026 0.089 0.114 0.018 0.026 0.042 0.039 86 81 86 71 82 79
Table 2: Strobe Current

Note: If the strobe and audible operate on the
Ratings same circuit, add the strobe current from Table 2
to the audible current from Table 1.
RMS Current (amps)
Model MT-121575 MT-241575 MTWP-2475 MT-24MCW RMS current ratings are per UL average
Candela 1575cd 1575cd 180cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd RMS UL max current rating is the maximum
method.
@24VDC 0.152 0.060 0.094 0.041 0.063 0.109 0.140
RMS within the listed voltage range (16-33v for
current
24v
units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at
UL max* 0.255 0.090 0.138 0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220
the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units).
audibles the max current is usually at the
maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For
unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation
instructions.
Wiring Diagrams (for all models)
-H
MT SIGNAL AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND STROBE OPERATE
STROBE OPERATE IN UNISON. RED AND BLACK SHUNT-
FROM + + TO NEXT INDEPENDENTLY WIRES ARE SUPPLIED.
PRECEDING
APPLIA
EOR EONLCR
,L,[ }fee
APPLIANCE,
4 TONEXT
DSM, AUDIBLE OR AUDIBLE
FROM
COOPER WHEELOCK
POWER SUPPLIES
OR
FAGP EOLR PRECEDING + APPLIANCE
APPLIANCE - OR EOLR
FROM OR FACP
PRECEDING
APPANcE, J
FACP
+ - &888%«coo
POWER SUPPLIES
lll ottf
STROBE OR
OR FACP seq.
SIGNAL
STROBE AUDIBLE
STROBE AUDIBLE
Specifications and Ordering Information
Model Order Input Rated Mounting Ag ency Approvals

Number Code Voltage Candela Options UL MEA CSFM FM BFP
MT-12/24-R 5023 12/24 - D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X X X X X
MT-12/24-W 5024 12/24 - D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X X X X X
MT-241575W-FR" 8422 24 15 (75 on AXIS) D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X X X X -
MT-24MCW-FR 3301 24 15/30/75/110 D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X - X - - I
MT-24MCW-FW 3303 24 15/30/75/110 D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X - X - -
MT-24MCW-AR*** 3304 24 15/30/75/110 D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X - X - -
MT-121575W-FR+ 8421 12 15 (75 on AXIS) D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X X X X -
MT-121575W-NW 9747 12 15 (75 on AXIS) D,E,F,L,M,O,P,R X X X X -
MTWP-2475W-FR** 8420 24 180 @ 77°F (25°C) M X X X X -
MTWP-2475W-NW** 9744 24 180 @ 77°F (25°C) M X X X X -
MT4-115-R 6223 120 VAC - D,E,J,K,N,O,R X X X - X
MT4-115-S 6142 120 VAC - D,E,J,K,N,O,R X X X - X
MT4-115-WH-VFR# 6224 120 VAC 15 D,E,J,K,N,O,R X X X - X
MT4-12/24-R 5308 12/24 - D,E,J,K,N,O,R X X X X -
MT4-12/24-S 7997 12/24 - D,E,J,K,N,O,R X X X X -
NOTE:
**MTWP-2475W is Weatherproof and rated for 180 cd@ 77°F (25°C). See Data Sheet S9004 or Installation Instruction P84150.
***For additional information on mounting please refer to Data Sheet S7000.
# 1575 strobes are UL Listed for 15cd with 75cd on AXIS.
## Series WH Strobe is listed for UL Standard 1638 only. See Instruction Sheet P83160.
*** "A" Stands for Agent Lettering.
WARNING: CONTACT WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT "INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS" P82467 MT-12/24, P84155 MT
w/Strobe P84150 MTWP WEATHERPROOF "GENERAL INFORMATION" SHEET (P82380) ON THESE PRODUCTS. THESE
DOCUMENTS DO UNDERGO PERIODIC CHANGES. IT IS IMPORTANT THAT YOU HAVE CURRENT INFORMATION ON
THESE PRODUCTS. THESE MATERIALS CONTAIN IMPORTANT INFORMATION THAT SHOULD BE READ PRIOR TO
SPECIFYING OR INSTALLING THESE PRODUCTS, INCLUDING:
• TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES CONNECTED TO SYSTEM SECONDARY POWER SOURCES.
• FUSE RATINGS ON NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS TO HANDLE PEAK CURRENTS FROM ALL APPLIANCES
ON THOSE CIRCUITS.
• COMPOSITE FLASH RATE FROM MULTIPLE STROBES WITHIN A PERSON'S FIELD OF VIEW.
• THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THESE PRODUCTS MUST BE WITHIN THEIR RATED INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE.
• INSTALLATION IN OFFICE AREAS AND OTHER SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION ISSUES.
• USE STROBES ONLY ON CIRCUITS WITH CONTINUOUSLY APPLIED OPERATING VOLTAGE. DO NOT USE STROBE
ON CODED OR INTERRUPTED CIRCUITS IN WHICH THE APPLIED VOLTAGE IS CYCLED ON AND OFF AS THE
STROBE MAY NOT FLASH.
• FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OR GENERAL INFORMATION SHEETS COULD
RESULT IN IMPROPER INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN
EMERGENCY SITUATION,WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU
AND/OR OTHERS.
• CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG), LENGTH AND AMPACITY SHOULD BE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION PRIOR TO DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION OF THESE PRODUCTS, PARTICULARLY IN RETROFIT INSTALLATIONS.
Wheelock products must be used within their published specifications and must be PROPERLY specified, applied, installed,
operated, maintained and operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installation and at
least twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, regulations and laws. Specification, application,
installation, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for proper operation in accordance with
all of the latest National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), National Electrical Code (NEC),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), local, state, county, province, district, federal and other applicable building
and fire standards, guidelines, regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the
requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Architects and Engineers
Specifications
The notification appliance shall be a Wheelock Series MT audible/visual appliance or equivalent. Notification appliance shall
be electronic and use solid state components. Electromechanical alternatives are not approved. Each electronic appliance shall
provide eight (8) field selectable alarm tones. The tones shall consist of: HORN, BELL, MARCH TIME HORN, CODE-3
HORN, CODE-3
TONE, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN and HI/LO. Tone selection shall be by durable dip switch assembly and not clips or jumpers.
The Multitone Audible appliance shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances. The audible and the
strobe shall be able to operate from a single NAC circuit while producing any of these tones. The appliance shall provide two
output sound levels: STANDARD and HIGH dBA. The HIGH dBA setting shall provide a minimum 5 dBA increase in sound output
at nominal voltage. The HIGH anechoic dBA measurement at 10 feet at the alarm HORN SETTING shall be 99 dBA minimum.
Operating voltages shall be
either 12 voe or 24 voe using filtered power or unfiltered power supply (full-wave-rectified). All models shall have provisions
for
standard reverse polarity type supervision and IN/OUT field wiring using terminals that accept #12 to #18 AWG
wiring.
Combination audible/visual appliances shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens or equivalent with
solid state circuitry. Strobe shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the voltage range. The MT strobe
intensity shall be rated per UL and Listed under Standard 1971 for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired for 1575cd multi-
candela with field selectable 15/30/75/11 O candela settings. The 1575 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela or with
75 candela intensity on-axis is required. Strobe Models shall incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash and shall be
designed for compatibility with Wheelock DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers panels with
built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the
module fails to operate (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobes shall revert to a non-synchronized default flash rate. Strobe
activation shall be via independent input or from the same input circuit as the audible.
The combination audible/visual appliances shall be installed indoors and may be surface or flush mounted. They shall
mount to
standard electrical hardware requiring no additional trim plate or adapter. The aesthetic appearance shall not have any mounting
holes or screw heads visible when the installation is completed. The appliance shall be finished in a textured red color.
The Series MT-12/24, MTWP and MT4 appliances may be installed indoor or outdoor with the proper back
box.
NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in
accordance with Wheelock Inc. standard terms and conditions.
JS5
5 l'isiaii
iiiiiii IE
WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET
CERTIFICATION
3 YEAR
WARRANTY
S2000 MT 06/11
NJ Location
273 Branchport Ave.
,,,,
Long Branch, NJ
07740
P: 800-631-2148
F: 732-222-8707
www.coopernotification.co
m
CooperNotificationis Wheelock" (MEDCJ SAFEPATH®

COOPER Notification
WAvtflJ@
I RELAY MODULE I
DESCRIPTION o00000ooo
0
The Relay Module[(CRM4), P/N 10-2204, provides 4 additional
independently programme re ays. Cy erCat, Cheetah Xi, or SHP
Control Panels can support up to 2 CRM4 modules (if either options
are not unused) on the main controller board. Each relay may be wired
9
across normally open or normally closed contacts. It interfaces to the
main control board using four standoffs supplied with the CRM4.
SPECIFICATIONS
g
0
Standby Current: OmA
Alarm Current: 0.010A per relay
Dimensions: 3-1/2" L x 1-1/2" H x 2" D
Weight: 0.10lbs
WIRING DIAGRAM
tJ)
•
CD 000000000000 NON O
P4[] POWER
LIMITE
D
¢
0 i□OOOOOOOOOI P4 ■ 0 (D
,-+
APPROVALS
UL - S2203
FM-OB4A7AY
MEA - 307-05-E
CSFM- 7165-0900:137
Form No. D.1.14.01

704 S. 10th Street · P.O. Box 610 · Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. · (816) 229-3405 · (816) 229-4615 · www.fike.com
AIR PRODUCTS
AND
CONTROLS
MS SERIES
REMOTE ACCESSORIES
,
Y.o,u- in Control
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The MS Series remote accessories are designed to be used with the Air Products and Controls Duct Smoke
Detectors to provide audible and visual indication as well as remote test/reset functions. These devices are
constructed of
attractive, yet durable brushed stainless steel and mount on a standard single or double gang electrical backbox.
-7
C C
• •
C
•
A LARM A LARM
t ot
@ @
Est RESET Est RESET
I MS-RA I MS-RA/P MS-RA/R MS-RA/P/R MS-RA/PIT
0
MS-RA/FT/P MS-KA/R MS-KA/P/R MS-KA/P/RIT MS-RD
· s.
C C C
•
C
. •
•
A N
is%,
.· s.
L
; •
AM
· '.
A LAM
,%,·° • ·,·,°
' s e.
. , %% ,
TOuOf
MS-FIT MS-RH/PIA MS-RH/KA/P/R MS- MS-RH

RH/KA/P/A/T SIGNALING
Air Products and Controls

CSFM LISTED MEA APPROVED
·@.
LISTED
is a Brand of Apollo
America
ml
25 Corporate Drive
Auburn Hills, Ml 48326 (248) 332-3900 Phone (888) 332-2241 Toll free
(248) 332-8807 Fax www.ap-c.com
H
A
L
M
A
G
R
O
U
P
COMPANY
EXA MPLE WIRING
dRED
(+)
RED
24VDC ALARM ALARM GREEN
HORN 24VDC PILOT
LED
LED
(-)
4BLACK
ALARM
PILOT
dRED 4BLACK
(+) (+)
YELLOW KEY OR
24VDC PUSH
TROU 24V BUTTON
BLE "TEST/RESET"
SWITCH
LED
(-)
4BLACK
(-)
> 4BLACK 1
FAULT/TROUBLE TEST/RESET
• t,· > FOR APPROPRIATE DUCT DETECTOR TERMINALS, PLEASE REFER TO DETECTOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
FAULT/ PUSH KEY
PILOT
ALARM TROUBLE BUTTON
OPERATED
LED LED LED TEST/ TEST/ SINGLE
DOUBLE (GREEN) (RED) (YELLOW) RESET RESET HORN GANG
GANG
[MS-RA [ • •
MS-RAIP • • •
MS-RAIR • • •
MS-RA/IPIR • • • •
MS-RAIPIT • • •
MS-RA/FT/P • • • •
MS-KAIR • • •
MS-KA/P/R • • • •
MS-KAIPIRIT • • • •
MS-RD • •
MS-FIT • •
MS-RH/PIA • • • •
MS-RH/KA/P/R • • • • •
MS-RH/KA/P/A/T • • • • • •
MS-RH • •
POWER REQUIREMENTS: Alarm LED 15mA@24VDC
Trouble LED Pilot LED 15mA@24VDC
15mA@24VDC
Alarm Horn 20mA@24VDC
SOUND PRESSURE: Alarm Horn 78 db@ 10 ft
DIMENSIONS: Single Gang 4 1/2(114.3mm)H x 2 3/4"(69.85mm)W
Double Gang 4 1/2(114.3mm)Hx4 1/2'(114.3mm)W
WIRING: LEDs/Horn 6"/ 24 AWG pigtails
Switches 6" /22 AWG pigtails
APPROVALS: UL Listed for use with Air Products and Controls duct smoke detectors including all
RW-Series, SM-Series, HS-Series and SL-Series duct smoke
detectors. UL URRQ, URRQ7.S7425
CSFM 7300-1004: 107
MEA 73-92-E VOL25
NOTICE: The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary and is subject to change without notice. The products described have specific
instructional/installation documentation. which covers various technical. approval. code. limitation and liability information. Copies of this documentation along with any
general product warning and limitation documents, which also contain important information, are provided with the product and are also available from Apollo
America The information contained in all of these documents should be considered before specifying or using the products. Any example applications shown are
subject to the most current enforced local/national codes, standards, approvals, certifications, and/or the authority having jurisdiction. All of these resources, as
well as the specific manufacturer of any shown or mentioned related equipment, should be consulted prior to any implementation. For further infonmation or assistance
concerning the products, contact Apollo America. Apollo America reserves the right to change any and all documentation without notice.
© Apollo America 2013 DS-DU-3
B050831
•
A•
6
CAUTION! .1
ls 227 -ell
This area protected
with CLEAN AGENT fire ! 227
extinguishing system
-.-i!_
.-"s al li.; ¢=. e•
e.!
is))
j+
Li}]
¢
J
si»
=l)
When alarm sounds =e:bs !

SJ)eli].i=: or on gas discharge
CLEA Ji_)ls&l
evacuate hazard areaiJl"
3l
AGENT immediately ' .ic
.l!ii5Y )iJl> ...

After discharge
'
g •
HFC-227ea ·
do NOT re-enter s
· •
YI ?l$
° ° S
until thoroughly «»l ' l ?9'
"
ventilated.
Warning Signs Illuminated signs using
high intensity LED indicators
Features Product Overview
• High brightness white LED indicators for

reliability and low power consumption
e The new range of illuminated warning signs employ the very
latest in LED technology to provide a high reliability, high
brightness, audio/ visual warning indication unit.
• Standard or easily customisable wording
and language variants
e The brightness of the sign remains constant over its entire
• Split level function - allows top half and
bottom half of sign to be illuminated
operating range of 15 to 30 volts DC due to the unique "power
boost" circuitry employed. This ensures that even with a system
independently with no light spillage
between halves running on depleted batteries, all signs remain at full intensity.
• Internal buzzer with disable and external

silence facility A range of standard text signs are available and customised
text and languages are easily accommodated due to the unique
• Available in red illuminated or yellow

illuminated as standard, other colours
available on request
method employed to apply the lettering.
e The split level design allows one message to be displayed in the
• Connects to standard fire alarm sounder

circuits
top half of the sign and an additional message to be displayed in
the bottom half of the sign allowing for two stage warnings for
systems such as extinguishing protection systems.
• Two wire 2-stage (top half/ bottom half)
voltage reversing input provided
e The signs are now also available in split colours. Red, green or
• Voltage reversing, silenceable sounder
output provided
yellow acrylic can be mounted in the top section and the bottom
section in any configuration. Text can be printed in black or
• Weatherproof version available

alternatively can be reversed so the letters appear in the colour
of the acrylic.
EVACUATE OM pOT MIER

l
$AS DISCHARGE cs 0s.
00INT EIMER
gs0.
(
Panels
Product Code Description Colour Size (mm)
SK27102 Illuminated sign• Red on black 300 X 195 X 50
"FIRE ALARM DO NOT
SK27101 ENTER" Illuminated sign• Red on black 300 X 195 X 50
"FIRE ALARM EVACUATE
SK27202 AREA" Illuminated sign• Black on 300 X 195 X 50
"DONT ENTER GAS DISCHARGED"
or yellow
"EVACUATE NOW GAS DISCHARGED"
SX2710 Special Designation (specify text) Red on black 300 X 195 X 50
SX2720 Special Designation (specify Black on 300 X 195 X 50
SX2730 text) Special Designation yellow Black 300 X 195 X 50
SWK27102 (specify text) Weatherproof on green Red 300 X 230 X 86
Illuminated sign• "FIRE ALARM on black
SWK27101 DO NOT ENTER"
Weatherproof Illuminated Red on black 300 X 230 X 86
sign• "FIRE ALARM EVACUATE
SWK27202 AREA"
Weatherproof Illuminated sign• Black on yellow 300 X 230 X 86
"EXTINGUISHANT SYSTEM
SWX2710 ACTIVATED" Special Designation (specify
Weatherproof Red on black 300 X 230 X 86
SWX2720 text) Weatherproof Special Designation Black on yellow 300 X 230 X 86
SWX2730 (specify text) Special Designation (specify text)
Weatherproof Black on green 300 X 230 X 86
Technical
Construction 1.2mm mild sheet steel (Standard)
Polycarbonate enclosure with metal chassis
IP Rating (Weatherproof) IP30 (Standard) IP66 (Weatherproof)
Finish Epoxy powder coated
Colour - lid & box BS 00 A 05 grey - fine texture
Weight 2kg
Power Consumption 140 milliamps max at 24V DC
Operating 5C to +50C
temperature Operating To 95% non-condensing
humidity Operating 15 to 30V DC
Voltage
2 WIRE
CONTRO
L
~
TO
ADDITIONAL SOUNDER
SIGNS OR
SOUNDERS O U
r
TPUT
LEV1 FLASH
LEV2 FLASH
ff
+ N ----
8 ~~geom
5
2 WIRE SILENCE
3 1/P SING/DUAL
8
DISABLE BUZZ
ENABLE SILENCE
n / 8mm
- ---300mm----
-
r
1 000000000000000000000000000000000
E
E
DONT ENTER
0 Lo
o
GAS DISCHARGED
L
e
000000000000000000000000000000000
,.. ,
0 0
Model No.
SK27102
¢
EVACUATE NOW
GAS DISCHARGE I
Special designations
example
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice
SHIELD FIRE, SAFETY AND SECURITY

LTD
Redburn House, 2A Tonbridge Road, Romford, Essex - RM3 8QE, United
Kingdom
Tel: +44 1708 377731, Fax: +44 1708 347637, E-mail:
Shielduk@shieldglobal.com
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. 3 CABLE & CONDUITS
65
Qatar Factory
Fire Rated Cables, 300/500V

V
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
SHIELI,-
'Premium'
Fire Performance Cable
wwwshieldglt .orrEiff' l
l ." J
CERTIFICATE
N463 t@Rn!
redbcoi, tcmn }
I
'Premium' Fire Performance Cable
tow smoke »logen emissions under fire conditions.
Introducing Shield 'Premium' Fire Performance Cable - independently approved

by
LPCB to meet all fire and fume emission testing detailed by B5 5839-
1:2013.
Certified by LPCB to meet fire test Standards - BS EN 50200:2006 + Annex E 30
minutes, B5 EN 50200 PH30, PH60 6 PH120 & 8$ 6387 CWZ. It is also fully approved
to the Low Smoke & Zero Halogen requirements detailed by BS 5839-:2013 8
8$7629-1.2008.
Shield 'Premium' Cable retains continuity for 3 hours
under
fire condition tested at 950° C.
EITEITT
8$ 5839-1:2013 cause
26.2d
BS EN 50200:2006 (PH 30 -PH 60 -PH 120) 830c fire and mechanical
shocks
BS EN 50200:2006 + Annex E 830C - 30 min. (15 min. fire water spray + mechanical shocks
for
every 5 min. throughout the 30 min.
test)
B$ 6387:2013 mire @ 950€- 180
min
Many Emergency tightingSystems now

require
a fire Performance cable to meet 85 EN
50200:2006PH60•
a ore hour fiwe performance
test,
Shield 'Premium' fire cable is certified by
✓
uP€8
to meet twice the required duration to IP\
HUO,.
be
le.,,
"9wt on
±
two hour duration.
Fire Cable for all Emergency %"""°

,~in¢,
'
Features Shield
Reduced Installation time and cost5
- Easy to install and Superb Working Flexibility
= All in one - Easy to Strip Outer Sheath
No Separate Foil
No Additional Fibre Wraps
No mica tape on conductors
No additional core separators to remove
Cable Construction Provides High Level Data Protection
The Fastest Fire Cable to Install
Shield 'Premium' Fire Cable is available in a variety of multiple core combinations all with PC
(circuit protection conductor). 500m reels and other special lengths are available.
Supplied on Robust Plastic eels; Installer sate and easy handling, Better Reeling and damage
resistant, Weather and moisture resistant
sheath Red Conductor
2 Core- D r 1 4 2 Core - 500m
$0-XPC210
100m n \C225 00
- R100
white 1.0mm SD-XP210 - $0-XPC210 - w500

1,5mm WI00 SD-XPC2 15 - W500
2.5mm $0-XPC215 - W100 $0-XPC225 - w500
$0-XPC225 -
W100
www.shieldglobal.com
a
I
o.aomm. ((I.~ TJ[ILl'K!\d
Copper (drain Wire
- co n d u ctor Cores
solid(4.0
coper "f
-----~-- - -- - -
Stranded}
Fe Re5stan1 1cw
Smoke zero Halogen S#cone Inlaton
LP4s approved to
Fire Resistane Standard R fN 502002006 ·Annex E 30 min
Fe @wsitanee Standard BS EN 50200. 2006 PH120
Fire Resistance Standard U$ 63587-1994 (le n cw
Halogen £rnisiin 5 £N 50267-2-1-1999
Standard BS EN 61034-2-2005
Also for use wth Low Smoke Standed $ 5266-1-2005
Emergency Lighting BS 5839-8.200 8
Meise Alaemn $ysterns Standard 8$ 56319.9200
Voice Communication Standard
(Rik semen4 May ternarl Mechanic.al Protec 0.8orvnpia (0.5omen2led copper
tion) Min Anneale d Coppe r
Drain Wre Fie Resistant zHLS 5»one
Conductor luriniur Foil
(dee tattice Lew Smnokc Halogen Fee Thermoplas tic
r
Screening 500¥
Outer sheath 100¥
Core to on Red, white or Elek
Type Core to 4PC 2,J64¢owe
1.0, 1.5, 2.5 8 4.0mnm CSA
Cuter Sheath
€0lours Nurnber of 18.1 0hmns' Km n
Cores Inner Core s 12.1 0hens! 1 Km
CSA
741 Ohms! Km
4.61 0hrs! 1 Kmm
1.0men CSA
1.5mmn CS
Minimum end ads 2m C4S n - 40c to +90'
4.0men CS 0¢ to +&¢
operating temp,
installation Temp. Radius 6 x Damnetet 44 0hmns my AA! m
voltage Drop
(0C or Single
Minimurn'Manxmnum
Minwnurn/' Manirnur
29 0hvnsmv
18 0hons mnv A' m
m
PhaseAc)
1.0men (54
1.541nCSA
z 1rn5C5
4
1.0mmn' 7.75wn
1.5mm ! 8.55mnrn
.5mm' 9.201rm
1.0rmn! 8.0Orner
1.5mm! 8.80men
2.5mm/ 1.10mmn
2 Core with CC
1.0mnm 9.56g/ 100 m

1.Smr 12.90' 100 r
2.5im 19,1Kg/ 100 m
1.0mm 10.9Kg / 100 m
1,5mm 14,5$g/ 100 m
2.5mm 22.2g/ 100 m
Cuerent Rating 1,0m m 154
(Current atinqluted are at 30'¢ 1.5mm 9.5.A
Refer o 8$7671/ut wing 2.5mr 27
Regulations toe dt-sating
ce t 1.0mnm 13A
1.5mrr 6.5A
2.5m
m 234
10Mu> at 500V d.c
1.5mm C4
7. C·Gt!! l!l"CPC} Core to Core - Average 7O pF/'m
3Cores«rt " Core to Screen -Awe+ age 130 pi/in
4Core 8(PC • core to (ore -Average75 pf/'m
Core to Core -Average 150 pf/r
2.5mmCA
z@o@@@} Core to Core -Average 80 pf/'m
3Cr 5 ac Core to Screen -Awe#age 14 pf/m
4Cure 8Kc = fore to Core -Average 85 pf/m
Core to Screen -Awes&g 16
Period pf/m t0 rs fron Date ol
Wanty lertifix.atin Mawuta tune
Date ot Manufacture Marked on cable
- --
www.shieldglobal.corn
SHIELD FIRE, SAFETY AND SECURITYLTD
Redburn House, 2A Tonbridge Road, Romford, Essex -RM38Q£,united Kingd
Tel +44 1708 377731, Fax: +44 • 1708 347637, E-mail: shielduk@shieldglobal.com
w ww
·' · · ,·i":- ..:.-. •·r·· ··
h ld bal.co
·. - ·· • -<•
· ~· -·
s ie glo m
Qatar Factory
EMT Conduits
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
A Product of Southern Steel Pipe Sdn. Bhd.
THE COLOURED
GALVANISED STEEL
CONDUIT TUBE
Smartube, Your Smarter Choice!
1]" semen SIFT.Pre
COND
20rm E1?
Smartube IMC
1" Southern Steel Pipe
AuAYsvA ]
J
~--- -I
Smartube CONDUIT
LEADING THE
STEEL PIPE Mr
INDUSTRY zzz
so
z .
z
t ..ld
t
"rt P
. -
4 .%
...
ISO 9001 :2000 Certificate from

Bureau Veritas
A member of the Southern Steel Group of
Companies, a leading steel mill in the region,
SOUTHERN STEEL PIPE SDN.BHD. can trace its roots
back to 1967 with the establishment of its parent
company Southern Pipe Industry (Malaysia)
Sdn. Bhd. which was founded as a joint-venture
between Malaysia and Japan.
Today, the pipe group consists of two steel pipe

factories in Malaysia, with a combine annual .. ~
OA L IT YMtN
--•
sales revenue of over USD l 00 million and an
annual capacity that exceeds 200,000mt.
T T T
rt ft
The many certifications garnered through mo at : 2000
the years are testament to the companies'
steadfast commitment in providing only the
best products
& services. Among others, it has the distinction of tr ti
being the first steel mill in the country to be ,,,.... ... iPI .....
.,,
awarded the ISO 9001 :2000 certification. The Carte.tenrt a 4a$
group's product lines were being exported to

countries all over the world.
ISO 9001 :2000 Certificate from

SIRIM QAS
r:
t
•de
'Nil•l!!'IIIP!!!liilltil
ff'4%4,446 4 tr
.d.
l
dl
a
t
red.4fl44.f l f. t
w ow
EMT Certificate from UL
CERTIFICATES
·®-"'•-11••0!-rt
rt fr
..
=_.E.._E... ..
tiwrf
~
--·· ·I &---
_
S=
l.
=
---Liz7SF+AZ. EEEE±EE:.=--=+
i5ESE5EEE=HE =
SCHEDULE
. 4 aM.fr
T
•
m m
tCLN
.
c u t
lf
e rr
t
EE-•
• -
4 T r.
zr-maw a'%
»u Cw rr
1drrt«r
Zztug
IMC Certificate from UL BS 31 1940 Certificate BS 31 1940 Certificate

from SIRIM OAS from SIRIM AS
SMARTUBE CROSS-SECTIONAL
CONDUIT VIEW OF
( In-line hot-dip galvanized conduit)
Utilising the latest, state-of-the-art in-line hot-dip SMARTUBE

galvanizing process, Smartube offer top notch
galvanised and coloured finishes. Smartube is easy to
bend simultaneously providing a smooth wire-pulling
feature.
CONDUIT
FEATURES • Protective polymer coot (red,
( l) Easy wire pushing and pulling orange, white colours, and
The slip coat on the inside wall makes
wire-pulling easy, and protects
clear ore available)
against damages.
(2) Advantages of colour conduits In-line hot-dip galvanized

• Saves time coating
• High quality finishing
• Save cost
• Steel
• Slip coat
COLOUR OPTIONS &
APPLICATIONS FOR
SMARTUBE CONDUIT
(In-line hot-dip galvanized conduit)
COLOURS
SMARTUBE RED
• Fire alarm & security system
S] IS@]
IESEEH EEEN
SMARTUBI WHITE
• Blends well in light coloured areas
• PA System & IT System
SMARTUBE CLEAR
• Standard for conventional applications
STANDARD &
SPECIFICATIONS
Smartube conduit is manufactured conforming
to the following standards:
• UL 797 (EMT)
• UL 1242 (IMC)
• BS 31
• BS4568
ei lL vs
I I Nominal I
Quantity In
Trade Size I Outside I Nominal Wall I Nominal I Nominal Wt. Per Primary I Master
Designator Diameter Thickness Unit Length Weight Bundle Bundle
100 Ft. (30.5M)
EE
I I I
I % 16 0.706 17.9 0.042 1.07 3.050 lO

«
32.19 14.60 lO 700
%% 21 0.922 23.4 0.049 1.25 3.050 lO 2.21 48.72 22.10 lO 500
27 1.163 29.5 0.057 1.45 3.050 lO 3.08 67.90 30.80 lO 300
35 1.510 38.4 0.065 l.65 3.050 lO 4.74 104.50 47.40 5 200
41 l.740 44.2 0.065 l.65 3.050 lO 5.49 121.03 54.90 5 150
53 2.197 55.8 0.065 l.65 3.050 lO 6.99 154.10 69.90 3 120
63 2.875 73.0 0.072 l.83 3.050 lO 10.16 223.99 101.60 6l
Remarks: Trade size 1-l /2" (41 mm) through 2-1 /2" (63mm) pending UL approval.
IMC - INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

UL LISTED FILE NO. E255245
I I Nominal I I I I I Quantity In I
Trade Size I Outside I Minimum Wall I Length Without Nominal I Nominal Wt. Per I Primary I Master I
Designator Diameter Thickness Coupling Weight l 00 Ft. (30.5M) Bundle Bundle
HE9I ISI
I
I ft and in.
I
a F
% 16 0.815 20.7 0.070 l.79 3.030 9 11-1/4 62.00 28.10 lO 350

%%. I 21 l.029 26.l 0.075 l.90 3.030 9 11-1/4 3.81 84.00 38.10 lO 250
I 27 l.290 32.8 0.085 2.16 3.025 9 ll 5.40 119.00 54.00 lO 170

3ll 35 l.638 41.6 0.085 2.16 3.025 9 ll 7.17 158.00 71.70 5 135
I 41 l.883 47.8 0.090 2.29 3.025 9 ll 8.80 194.00 88.00 5 110

I 53 2.360 59.9 0.095 2.41 3.025 9 ll 11.61 256.00 116.10 5 80
3 I 78 3.476 88.3 0.140 3.56 3.010 9 10-1/2 24.63 543.00 246.30 30
E91 3.971 100.9 0.140 3.005 9 10-1/4 28.53 629.00 285.30 24

I l3l IE3 9 10-1/4 EEIEIERE
IF3HE3I
B 3
a
3
BS3 1: 1940 THREADED CONDUIT
HEAVY GAUGE CLASS B
Quantity In
Unit
Primary I Master
Length Nominal Weight Bundle Bundle
IE3I n e
I
3.05 n] '
¾ 19 0.745 18.9 0.063 1.6 0.70 0.21 lO 50
3.81 2.67
I 25 0.993 25.2 0.063 1.6

3.05
3.81
2.90
3.62
0.95 0.29 lO 50
I
I 1-1/4 32 l.245 31.6 0.063 1.6
3.05
3.81
3.66
4.57
1.20 0.37 5 25
11
I 1-1/2 38 l.493 37.9 0.071 1.8
3.05 5.00
I
• -
l.64 0.50 5 25
3.81 6.25
2 50 l.992 50.6 0.080 3.05 7.44

2.44 0.74 3
;
EE2
2.0 15
BS 4568: PART 1:1970 THREADED

CONDUIT HEAVY GAUGE
Quantity In
Trade Size Nominal Unit
Nominal Weight Primary Master
Designator Diameter Wall Thickness Length
Bundle Bundle
mm mm mm m kg/pc kg/m kg/ft
I ■I
3.00 2.14
20 19.85 1.6 3.75 2.67 0.713 0.217 lO 50
I
3.81 2.72
3.00 2.71
25 24.8 1.6 3.75 3.39 0.903 0.275 lO 50

0 3.44
■
3.81
3.00 3.56
2
32 31.80 1.6 3.75 4.44 1.185 0.361
5
5
#h 4_
tz Southern Steel
SOUTHERN STEEL PIPE SDN. BHD. (237316-T)
4457, Mk. 15, Jalan Chain Ferry
12100 Butterworth, P. W., Malaysia
Tel: +604-331
7393
Fax: +604-331
0942
+604-331 9435
Website: www.spim.com.my
www.southsteel.com
E-mail: contact@spim.com.my
For further enquiries, please

Call: +604-323
2680
Fax: +604-331
0942
To place your order, kindly

call:
Care has been taken to ensure that the content of this catalog is as
accurate as possible. Southern Steel Pipe however does not accept any
liability whatsoever for errors or for any information which is found to be
misleading. The contents of this catalog may change from time to time
without prior notice.
s
00
CERTIFIED TO MS IS0 9001.2000

REGISTRATION NO AR 0431
Excellent corrosion resistance and durability.
This helps save on labor for pipe laying work.
MR8RRRRR R Rt FTEEEe
1. Uncoiling 11.Sizing
High quality strip steel coils are uncoiled The cooled, galvanized tubing is rolled to
and sent to the forming mills. precise outside diameters in accordance
with customer specifications.
WHITE CONDUIT PIPE (UL,BS) 2. Coil-End Welding
Both ends of the coils are welded to form 12. Anti-Corrosion Coating
a single strip. For protection in addition to zinc coating, the
galvanized surface is finished with a clear
3. Temporary Coil-Storing
anti-corrosion coating.
Superior galvanizing by in-line hot-dip process for greater protection against Strip steel is stored here temporarily for coil
corrosion. Finished with durable and clear anti-corrosion coating for higher protection end welding without stopping the main line. 13. Cutting
outside Tubing is square-cut to the specified lengths.
4. Cleaning
and higher grade epoxy coating inside. 14. Chamfering and Threading
All surface scale and oil on the strip steel are
removed to assure accurate forming and Both ends of the cut conduit are chamfered
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW OF Panasonic WHITE CONDUIT rigid welding. and threaded to precise tolerance.
@lg\@/:/
oo 0)o5
Underwriters 5. Forming 15. Marking
Laboratories
Inc.®
The flat strip steel is rolled into basic Brand name, size, standards,
Anti-corrosion coating
Standards tubing. production codes, etc. are marked on
Zinc coating
the conduit.
6. Welding
Panasonic WHITE CONDUIT is
·+ Steel Basic tubes are welded by a high frequency 16. Bundling
available in four types conforming to
$' Inside Coating induction wider. This type of welding assures Finished conduit is steel strapped into
1.Stoved epoxy resin coating type the following standards:
rigidity, splitting-resistance and effectively approximately one metric ton bundle.
2.Zinc coating type UL/ANSI (EMT, IMC and RSC]
BS (B31-1940 and BS4568-1970] eliminates inside flash.
17. Inspection
* JIS (Plain, Thin Wall and Thick Wall] 7. Inside Coating At all steps of production, strict quality
The inside wall of the conduit is coated with control is enforced. Unless customer
epoxy resin. specifies UL, or other certificates, all
Features 8. Cleaning
conduit is inspected according to factory
specifications.
1. Easy and Accurate Bending All surface scale and oil are removed from
Panasonic WHITE CONDUIT is made of high quality steel and processed by high frequency the tubing prior to galvanizing.
induction welding to prevent cracking when bend. 9. In-line Hot-Dip Galvanizing
The exterior of the tubing is uniformly and
2. Easy Wire Pushing and Pulling
rigidly galvanized by a patented inline hot 9.In-line Hot-Dip Galvanizing
The high-grade stoved epoxy resin coating on the inside wall makes wire-pulling
dip process.
easy, and protects conduit against corrosion.
10.Cooling
3. Easy Coupling and Fast Installation
The heated galvanized tubing is cooled.
Precise, sharp threads cut by automated machinery ensures fast and easy .Inspection
installation. Precise thread also makes our conduit virtually moisture-tight.
E
4. High Corrosion Resistance
Pure zinc coating on the exterior wall and stoved epoxy resin finish on the inside protects
, 16.Bunning
WHITE CONDUIT from corrosion, even by harsh chemicals and sea air.
D 15.Mamong
5. Uniform Quality 14.Chamfering and Threading
Flat steel is rolled, zinc-coated and threaded in one continuous automated

process for uniform high quality.
10.Cooling
132
133
11
ANSI/UL ANSI/UL Accessories
Certification
.e .4 .-
-
.- Normal Bends (for EMT)
Couplings (Steel) (for EMT)
..
"owe
Listed by "UL"File No.E-44051
4..0 4
• .- UL797
..4
. 0 0 •
44 4
.0ob. . 0 0 •
Size Standard Pack Weight Size Standard Pack Weight
Item No. (Pcs/Box) (Kg/pc) Item No. (inch) (Pcs/Box) (Kg/pc)
(inch)
DSE 04012Y 1/2 80 0.10 DSE 01012Y 1/2 300 0.038
DSE 04034Y 3/4 35 0.20 DSE 01034Y 3/4 200
@ @ @ 0.071
DSE 04100Y 1 36 0.40 DSE 011 DOY 1 100 0.095
[ED 'ilS[El LlS[ED DSE04114Y 1-1/4 20 0.60 DSE 01114Y 1-1/ 4 60 0.14 7
UL 797 UL 1242 UL6 DSE04112Y 1-1/2 28 0.80 DSE01112Y 1-1/2 60 0.178
==
DSE 04200Y 2 15 1.10 DSE 01200Y 2 30 0.261
EMT (Electrical Metallic Tubing)

Listed by "UL"File No.E-44051 UL 797 / ANSI C80.3
Size Outside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness Length Nominal Weight Primary Bundle Master Bundle
Item No. (Pcs)
(inch) (mm) Imm) (mm) (Kg/pc) (pcs)
DWE012Y 1/2 17. 93 1.02 3,048 1.46 10
500 Connector (Steel) (for EMT) Flexible Conduit
DWE034Y 3/4 23.42 1.18 3,048 2.21 10
300
Size Standard Pack Weight Size Outside Diameter Standard Pack Weight
DWElOOY 1 29 .54 1.37 3,048 3.08 5 200 Item No. (inch) (Pcs/Box) (Kg/pc) Item No. (inch) (mm) Im/Roll) (Kg/pc)
DWE114Y 1-1/ 4 38.35 1 .57 3,048 4. 74 5 125
DFM 020122Y 1/2 300 0.040 DME 012 1/2 21.84-23.37 30 7 .80
DWE112Y 1-1/2 44.20 1 .57 3,048 5.49 5 100
DFM 020342Y 3/4 200 0.066 DME 034 3/4 26.54-28.07 30 9. 70
DWE200Y 2 55.80 1 .57 3,048 6. 99 3 75
DFM 021002¥ 1 100 0.086 DME100 1 33.02-35.05 15 5.80
DWE212Y 2-1/2 73.03 1 .74 3,048 9.80 - 40
DWE300Y 3 88. 90 1 .74 3,048 11. 99 - 30
DWE312Y 3'1/2° 101.60 1 .97 3,048 15.80 - 20
DWE400Y 4 114.30 1 .99 3,048 17 .81 - 20
IMC (Intermediate Metal Conduit)

Listed by "UL"File No.E-62193
C80.6
UL 1242 / ANSI ==
a
Normal Bends (for IMC)
Item No.
Size
(inch)
Standard Pack
(Pcs/Box)
Weight
(Kg/pc)
Couplings (Steel) (for IMC)
Item No. Size

(inch)
Standard Pack
(Pcs/Box)
Weight
(Kg/pc)
=
Size Outside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness Length Nominal Weight Primary Bundle Master Bundle
DFM 13012Y 1/2 54 0.30 DFM11012Y 1/2 250 0.059
Item No. inch) (mm) Imm) (mm) (Kg/pc) (pcs) (Pcs)==e
DFM 13034Y 3/4 50 0.40 DFM 11034Y 3/4 200 0.090
1/2 20. 70 1. 79 3,030 2.85 10 300
DFM 1 30 0.80 DFM 11 lOOY 1 150 0.125
3/4 26.14 1. 90 3,030 3. 94 10 250
13100Y
( DFM 1-1/4 36 1.00 DFM 11114Y 1-1/ 4 100 0.187
1 32. 77 2.16 3,025 5.23 5 125
13114Y 1-1/2 21 1.40 DFM 11112Y 1-1/2 100 0.219
DWM012Y 1-1/ 4 41. 59 2.16 3,025 7.48 3 75
DFM13112Y DFM 2 10 2. 50 DFM 11200Y 2 40 0.330
DWM034Y
1-1/2 4 7.81 2.29 3,025 8.67 3 75
13200Y DFM 2-1/2 1 4.80 DFM11212Y 2-1/2 18 0. 770
DWMlOOY
2
13212Y
59. 93 2.41 3,025 11.65 - 50
DWM114Y DFM 3 1 6.60 DFM 11300Y 3 18 0.837
2-1/2 72. 56 3.56 3,010 18. 71 - 40
13300Y DFM 3-1/2 1 8. 90 DFM11312Y 3-1/2 12 1.182
DWM112Y
3
13312Y
88.29 3.56 3,010 22.87 - 30
DWM200Y DFM 4 1 12.30 DFM 11400Y 4 12 1.336
3-1/2 1 00.86 3.56 3,005 26.43 - 20
DWM212Y
DWM300Y
DWM312Y
DWM400Y 4 113.40 3.56 3,005 29.84 - 15
RSC (Rigid Steel Conduit)

Listed by "UL"File No.E-157617 UL 6 / ANSI C80.1
Size Outside Diameter Nominal Wall Thickness Length Nominal Weight Primary Bundle Master Bundle Normal Bends (for RSC) Couplings (Steel) (for RSC)
Item No.
(inch) (mm) Imm) (mm) (Kg/pc) (pcs) (Pcs)
DWRO12/Z¥ Size Standard Pack Weight Size Standard Pack Weight
1/2 21.34 3,030 300 Item No. (inch) (Pcs/Box) (Kg/pc) Item No. (inch) (Pcs/Box) (Kg/pc)
2.64 3. 75 10
DWRO34/Z¥ 3/4 26.67 2. 72 3,030 4. 96 10 250 DFR 13012Y/Z¥ 1/2 54 0.32 DFR 11012Y/Z¥ 1/2 250 0.059
DWR1OOY/ZY 1 33.40 3.20 3,025 7.33 5 125 DFR 13034Y/Z¥ 3/4 50 0.46 DFR 11034Y/Z¥ 3/4 200 0.090
DWR114Y/ZY 1-1/ 4 42.16 3.38 3,025 9. 97 3 75 DFR 13100Y/Z¥ 1 30 0.88 DFR 11100Y/2Z¥ 1 150 0.125
DWR112/Z¥ 1-1/2 48.26 3.51 3,025 11. 94 3 75 DFR 13114Y/Z¥ 1-1/4 36 1.60 DFR 11114Y/Z¥ 1-1/ 4 100 0.187
DWR2OOY/ZY 2 60.33 3. 71 3,025 16.00 - 50 DFR 13112Y/Z¥ 1-1/2 21 2.11 DFR 11112Y/Z¥ 1-1/2 100 0.219
DWR212Z¥ 2-1/2 73.03 4. 90 3,010 25.62 - 40 DFR 13200Y/Z¥ 2 10 3.20 DFR 11200Y/Z¥ 2 40 0.330
DWR3OOZY 3 88. 90 5.21 3,010 33.43 - 30 DFR 132127 2-1/2 1 5. 70 DFR 112122 2-1/2 18 0. 770
DWR4OOZY 4 114.30 5. 72 3,005 4 7.38 - 15 DFR 133002 3 1 9.12 DFR 113002 3 18 0.837
DWR5OOZY 5 141.30 6.22 2,995 64.38 - 10 DFR 133122 3-1/2 1 17.02 DFR 113122 3-1/2 12 1.182
DWR6OOZY 6 168.28 6. 76 2,995 84.05 - 5 DFR 134002 4 1 18.48 DFR 11400Z 4 12 1.336
*Note: 2 Items are hot-dip galvanized both inside and outside.
134 135
11
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. 4 PIPES & FITTINGS
66
Qatar Factory
Black Steel Seamless

P~pes
e
QATAR FACTORY CERTIFIED TO 1$0 9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@ www.gatarfactory.ga
]
a
a
r
o
r
a
o
st
w
e
E
T
E
II
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
1$
0
14
00
1.2
00
4
No
,01
74
4/1
BS
OH
SA
$
180
01.
20
07
N0.
00
75
1/1
1$
0
T$
290
0
1.2
01
0
No
.00
01
6/1
Pipes
&
Fittings
c!
@ .
LISTED
'u s ' [
'-
Introduction
Shield is a company created to cater to the infrastructure, fire

protection and building service industries with a comprehensive
range of products designed to be competitive and of assured
quality.
We stay ahead of today's evolving market requirements

by committing to a program of continued research and
development.
We are able to maintain our high standards by ensuring that

our worldwide manufacturing networks are the most advanced
in the industry in Europe, Asia and America in terms of quality
and delivery lead time. Our fully experienced and professional
staff is there to provide engineering expertise and after sales
service exactly when you need it.
Combine this with highly responsive and customer focused

network of distribution centers around the world, you will find
that customer satisfaction is what we excel at.
We are justifiably proud of our global client base. With offices

and facilities in UK and Middle East, we are able to comprehend
the specific needs of your particular region.
Contents
I Pipes I Page
I Pipes 2
Pipes (BS1387)
A53) I(ASTM
3
Threaded Fittings 4
Elbow 90- SDT-100 5
Reducing Elbow 90- SDT-101 5
Elbow 45- SDT-200 5
Tee - SDT-12 6
Reducing Tee - SDT53 6
Reducing Coupling - SDT-30 7
Cross - SDT-13 7
Reducing Cross - SDT-51 7
Straight Coupling - SDT-22 8
Plug - SDT55 8
Cap-SDT-14 8
Hex Bushing - SDT-57 9
Union - SDT-59 9
Nipple - SDT-11 9
Grooved Fittings 10
Rigid Coupling - Standard - SDG-22 11
Rigid Coupling - Light - SDG-20 12
Flexible Couplings - Heavy Duty - SDG-27 12
Flexible Couplings - Standard - SDG-25 13
Flexible Couplings - Light - SDG-21 14
Reducing Couplings- SDG-30 15
Elbows - 90° SDG-100, 45° SDG-200, 90° SDG-105 16
Elbows- 22.5° SDG-225 & 11.25° SDG-112 17
Tee - SDG-12, SDG-13 Cross, SDG-102 18
Cap- SDG-14 18
Grooved Flange - SDG-15 & Adaptor Flange - SDG-16 19
Reducing Tee - SDG-53 20
Concentric Reducer Grooved - SDG-35 & Theaded - SDG-37 21
Eccentric Reducer Grooved - SDG-33 22
Mechanical Tee Threaded Outlet - SDG-42 23
Mechanical Tee Grooved Outlet - SDG-44 25
Mechanical Cross Threaded - SDG-47 26
Mechanical Cross Grooved - SDG-49 27
Mechanical Tee U-Bolt - SDG-40 28
Roll Groove 28
Swivel Hanger - SD-HB 29

Clives Hanger - SD-HC 30
Shield Pipes
Technical
Black and]
Data
aalvanized r Hirai
/welded pipes
stee
Conforming to BS: 1387 OF 1985
-
C it }
-
• ·"
Plain Ended Screwed & Socketed Plain Ended Screwed & Socketed
a
. EHELER IEEE TEELE
s
/ 15 0.843 21.4 0.827 21.0 0.079 2.00 0.947 1056 3465 0.956 1046 3432 1.000 1000 3281 1.009 991 3251 160
3% 20 1059 26.9 1.039 26.4 0.091 2.30 1.380 725 2379 1.390 719 2359 1.440 694 2277 1.460 690 2264 110
L
1 25 1.331 33.8 1.307 33.2 0.102 2.60 1.980 505 1657 2.000 500 1640 2.060 485 1591 2.090 478 1568 80
11% 32 1.673 42.5 1.650 41.9 0.102 2.60 2.540 394 1293 2.570 389 1276 2.640 379 1243 2.680 373 1224 61
G 1l/ 40 1.906 48.4 1.882 47.8 0.114 2.90 3.230 310 1017 3.270 306 1004 3.350 298 978 3.400 294 965 51
2 50 2.370 60.2 2.346 59.6 0.114 2.90 4.080 245 804 4.150 241 791 4.220 237 778 4.300 233 764 37
H
2'% 65 2.991 76.6 2.961 75.2 0.124 3.20 5.710 175 574 5.830 172 564 5.890 170 558 6.020 166 545 27
T 3 80 3.492 88.7 3.461 87.9 0.124 3.20 6.720 149 489 6.890 145 476 6.930 144 472 7.100 141 463 24
(A) 4 100 4.484 113.9 4.449 113.0 0.142 3.60 9.750 103 338 10.000 100 328 10.030 100 328 10.280 97 318 16
h 15 0.854 21.7 0.831 21.1 0.102 2.60 1.210 826 2710 1.220 820 2690 1.250 794 2605 1.260 787 2582 130
3 20 1.071 27.2 1.047 26.6 0.102 2.60 1.560 641 2103 1.570 637 2090 1.620 617 2024 1.640 610 2001 100
M
1 25 1.346 34.2 1.315 33.4 0.124 3.20 2410 415 1362 2.430 412 1352 2.490 402 1319 2510 398 1306 65
E 11% 32 1.689 42.9 1.657 42.1 0.124 3.20 3.100 323 1060 3.130 319 1047 3.200 312 1024 3.230 310 1017 51
D 1l% 40 1.921 48.8 1.890 48.0 0.124 3.20 3.570 280 919 3.610 277 909 3.680 272 892 3.720 269 883 44
2 50 2.394 60.8 2.354 59.8 0.142 3.60 5.030 199 653 5.100 196 643 5.170 193 633 5.250 190 623 30
u 2'% 65 3.016 76.6 2.969 75.4 0.142 3.60 6.430 156 512 6.550 153 502 6.610 151 495 6.730 149 489 24
3 80 3.524 89.5 3.469 88.1 0.157 4.00 8.370 119 390 8.540 117 384 8.580 117 384 8.760 114 374 19
M 4 100 4.524 114.9 4.461 113.3 0.177 4.50 12.200 82 269 12.500 80 262 12.480 80 260 12.690 79 259 14
(B) 5 125 5.535 140.6 5.461 138.7 0.197 5.00 16.600 60 197 17.100 58 190 16.940 59 194 17.440 57 187 10
6 150 6.539 166.1 6.461 164.1 0.197 5.00 19.70 51 167 20.300 49 161 20.100 50 164 20.710 48 157 7
h 15 0.854 21.7 0.831 21.1 0.124 3.20 1.440 694 2277 1.450 690 2264 1.490 671 2202 1.500 667 2188 110
H 3 20 1.071 27.2 1.047 26.6 0.124 3.20 1.870 535 1755 1.880 532 1745 1.930 518 1700 1.950 513 1683 80
1 25 1.346 34.2 1.315 33.4 0.157 4.00 2.940 340 1115 2.960 338 1109 3.010 332 1089 3.040 329 1079 55
E
11% 32 1.689 42.9 1.657 42.1 0.157 4.00 3.800 263 863 3.830 261 856 3.900 256 840 3.930 254 833 44
A 1l/ 40 1.921 48.8 1.890 48.0 0.157 4.00 4.380 228 748 4.420 226 741 4.490 223 732 4.530 221 725 37
V 2 50 2.394 60.8 2.354 59.8 0.177 4.50 6.190 162 531 6.260 160 525 6.330 158 518 6.400 156 512 27
y 2'% 65 3.016 76.6 2.969 75.4 0.177 4.50 7.930 126 413 8.050 124 407 8.110 123 404 8.230 121 397 20
3 80 3.524 89.5 3.469 88.1 0.197 5.00 10.300 97 318 10.500 95 312 10.510 95 312 10.710 93 307 16
(C) 4 100 4.524 114.9 4.461 113.3 0.213 5.40 14.500 69 226 14.800 68 223 14.770 68 223 15.070 67 220 12
5 125 5.535 140.6 5.461 138.7 0.213 5.40 17.900 56 184 18.400 54 177 18.210 55 180 18.730 53 174 10
6 150 6.539 166.1 6.461 164.1 0.213 5.40 21.300 47 154 21.900 46 151 21.700 46 151 22.300 45 148 7
Tolerances:
SHIELD reserves the right to change the contents without notice.
THICKNESS: Light Tube -8%, Medium and Heavy Tubes -10%.
WEIGHT: Single Tube +10% -8%, Quantity - 150 metres and above of one size & class
±4%. LENGTH: 6 metres ±0.05 metres
I
Shield
(9
Pipes LISTED
Seamless carbon steel & welded steel pipe

pipe to ASTM A53, Grade B
•• ••
Nominal
Pipe O.D. Standard Schedule 40 Sched ule 60
RE
mm
Sched ule 80
size
Inches
----
2.31 0.84 2.31 0.84 3.20
2.77 1.27 2.77 1.27 3.73
3%% 17. 2.87 1.69 2.87 1.69 3.91
1
/2 21.
3/
11/ 3
26.
48.3 3.68 4.05 3.68 4.05 5.08 5.39
----
7 .38 2.50 3.38 2.50 4.55 3.25
21 33.
60.3 3.91 5.44 3.91 5.44 5.54 7.48
11/ 42.2 3
21/% 73.0 5.16 8.63 5.16 8.63 7.01 11.41
3.56 3.39
3 88.9 5.49 11.29 5.49 11.29 7.62 15.27
1.10
----
31/% 101.6 5.74 13.57 5.74 13.57 8.08 18.63
1.62
4 114.3 6.02 16.07 6.02 16.07 8.56 22.32
2.21
5 141.3 6.55 21.77 6.55 21.77 9.52 30.94
6 168.3 7.11 28.26 7.11 28.26 10.97 42.56
8 219.1 6.35 33.31 7.04 36.31 8.18 42.55
3.56
8.18 3.39
42.55 10.31 53.08
4.85
12.70
4.47
64.64
10 273.0 6.35 41.75 7.80 51.01 9.27 60.29 9.27 60.29 12.70 81.52 15.09 95.97
12 323.8 6.35 49.71 8.38 65.18 9.52 73.78 10.31 79.70 14.27 108.92 17.48 132.04
14 355.6 6.35 54.69 7.92 67.9 9.52 81.25 9.52 81.25 11.13 94.55 15.09 126.71 19.05 158.10
16 406.4 6.35 62.64 7.92 77.83 9.52 93.17 9.52 93.17 12.70 123.30 16.66 160.12 21.44 203.53
18 457.2 6.35 70.60 7.92 87.75 11.13 122.43 9.52 105.10 14.27 155.87 19.05 205.83 23.83 254.67
20 508.0 6.35 78.55 9.52 117.02 12.70 155.12 9.52 117.02 15.09 183.42 20.62 247.83 26.19 311.17
24 609.6 6.35 94.46 9.52 140.88 14.27 209.50 17.48 255.24 24.61 355.02 30.96 441.78
Shield reserves the right to change the contents without notice.

Wall = Wall thickness in mm
Wt. = Weight in Kg/Mtr.
Available in black & hot dipped galva~
Shield UL pipe is applicable for Seamle/ss Welded steel pipe Sch 40, sizes %" to 12°
For further information on any aspect of the
Shield range of Pipes & Fittings please contact your nearest office.
United Kingdom
29th floor, Regus Suite, One Canada
Square
Canary Wharf, London
Email:
shielduk@shieldglobal.com
Tel:+ 44 (0) 207 7121610 / + 44 (0) 207

7121722
Fax: + 44 (0) 207 712 1578

www.shieldglobal.com
Qatar Factory
Threaded Fittings
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
JDa....a.• =Dr ys
ask
T~
Croix
[@ass 300Ts} 6000 lbs.

Dimensions: ASME B 16.11-2011
Thread: ANSI B 1.20.1- 1983
Nominal 3000 6000

pipe size A
Diam~tre
nominal inches mm inches inches inches inches inches
1/4 4 •
3/8 1.12 29 1.31 33 0.138 1.31 33 1.50 38 0.275

3,51 6,98
1/2 1.31 33 1.50 38 0.161 4,09 1.50 38 1.81 46 0.321 8,15
3/4 1.50 38 1.81 46 0.170 4,32 1.75 44 2.19 56 0.336 8,53
1.75 44 2.19 56 0.196 4,98 2,00 51 2.44 62 0.391 9,93
1 1/4 2.00 51 2.44 62 0.208 5,28 2.38 60 2.97 75 0.417 10,59
1 1/2 2.38 60 2.97 75 0.219 5,50 2.50 64 3.31 84 0.436 11,07
2 2.50 64 3.31 84 0.281 7,14 3.25 83 4.00 102 0.476 12,09
2 1/2 3.25 83 4.00 102 0.301 7,65 3.75 95 4.75 121 0.602 15,29
3 3.75 95 4.75 121 0.348 8,84 4.19 106 5.75 146 0.655 16,64
4 4.50 114 6.00 152 0.440 11,18 4.50 114 6.00 152 0.735 18,67
Red. Tees & Red. Crosses - refer to page 63
[Sal
Manchon
Demi-manchon
[@ass3@@@Tbs} 600o lbs.

■
6000
m
IEE
m ) .CECE
tz
E 1.38 35 0.75 20 1.38 35 1.00 26
DD 1.so 38 0.88 22 1.50 38 1.25 32
1.ss 48 1.12 28 1.88 48 1.50 38
fZ 2.00 51 1.38 35 2.00 51 1.75 44
2.38 60 1.75 44 2.38 60 2.25 57
2.62 67 2.25 57 2.62 67 2.50 64
3.12 79 2.50 64 3.12 79 3.00 76
3.38 86 3.00 76 3.38 86 3.62 92
3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 4.25 108
4.25 108 4.25 108 4.25 108 5.00 127
4.75 121 5.50 140 4.75 121 6.25 159
6
~ ELCO R TE
~1r1r0[i"'i](§~
a ouchon feme
Gmin.
[ass3@@@Tbs} 600o lbs.

Dimensions: ASME B 16.11-
2011
Thread: ANSI B 1 20.1- 1983
Nominal 6000
pipe size p
Diam~tre
nominal inches mm inches inches inches inches inches
1/4 II
3/8 1.00 25 0.88 22 0.19 4,8 1.06 27 1.25 32 0.25 6,4

1/2 1.25 32 1.12 28 0.25 6,4 1.31 33 1.50 38 0.31 7,9
3/4 1.44 37 1.38 35 0.25 6,4 1.50 38 1.75 45 0.31 7,9
1.62 41 1.75 45 0.38 9,7 1.69 43 2.25 57 0.44 11,2
1 1/4 1.75 44 2.25 57 0.38 9,5 1.81 46 2.50 64 0.44 11,2
1 1/2 1.75 44 2.50 64 0.44 11,2 1.88 48 3.00 76 0.50 12,7
2 1.88 48 3.00 76 0.50 12,7 2.00 51 3.62 92 0.62 15,7
2 1/2 2.38 60 3.62 92 0.62 15,7 2.50 64 4.25 108 0.75 19,0
3 2.56 65 4.25 108 0.75 19,0 2.69 68 5.00 127 0.88 22,4
4 2.69 68 5.50 140 0.88 22,4 2.94 75 6.25 159 1.12 28,4
HEX HEAD PLUG

t~te hexagonale
Special UNF
cylandrical Plugs
on request
1" 1/4
1" 1/8
J
1" 3/8
1" 5/8
1" 7/8
I Class 3000 I-
lbs. 6000 lbs.
Dimensions: ASME B 16.11- 2011
E .
»moo
.
.
Amin F nominal H min.
rz inches inches inches
0.44 0.62 0.25
0.50 13 0.69 0.31
0.56 14 0.88 0.31
0.62 16,0 1.06 0.38
0.75 19,0 1.38 0.38
0.81 21 1.75 0.56
0.81 21 2.00 0.62
0.88 22,0 2.50 0.69
1.06 27,0 3.00 0.75
1.12 28 3.50 0.81
1.25 32,0 4.62 7 1.00
JDa....a.•=Dr ys
HEX HEAD BUSHING

R~duction
m~le-femelle
Class 3000 lbs. - 6000 lbs.

2011
E
3000-6000
.
. Amin F nominal Gmin.
.
inches inches inches
EITEI 0.50 0.69 0.16
EEEIT
EI
0.56 0.88 0.19
0.56 0.88 0.19
ETTIE
T 0.62 1.06 0.22
E E 0.62
0.75
1.06
1.38
0.22
0.25
S I
.
0.75 1.38 0.25
0.75 1.38 0.25
ERE 0.81 1.75 46,0 0.28
ENI 0.81 2.00 50,0 0.31
II5 0.81 2.00 50,0 0.31
I2S 0.81 2.00 50,0 0.31

IEEE 0.88 2.50 65,0 0.34
ER. 0.88 2.50 65,0 0.34
1.06 3.00 75,0 0.38
1.12 3.50 90,0 0.41
1.25 4.62 115,0 0.50
1.25 4.62 115,0 0.50
SQUARE HEAD PLUG ...-c-..1

Bouchon m~le t 1 -!
t~te carr~e 8
[@ass_3oo@ibs} 6000 lbs.
2011
E . #al«oo
. Amin C nominal Bmin.
.
0.38 0.28 0.25
0.44 0.38 10 0.25
0.50 0.44 11 0.31
0.56 0.56 14 0.38
0.62 0.62 16 0.44
0.75 0.81 21 0.50
0.81 0.94 24 0.56
0.81 1.12 0.62
0.88 1.31 0.69
1.06 1.50 0.75
JDa....a.• =Dr ys
Es
lamelon r~duit
e
£
A sur plat }
AIF Hex. A
Dimensions: BS 3799- 1974

EEEJEE
Nominal pipe size
Diam~tre nominal
IEEE H=
NAE
IE'II GET 0.59 15 0.59 15 0.39 10 0.19 5 1.22 31 0.20 5 0.08 2
3/8
EEO
X 1/4 o.71 18 0.63 16 0.59 15 0.31 8 1.54 39 0.31 8 0.24 6
IEEEIEEEE o.s 22 0.79 20 0.63 16
11
0.31 8 1.73 44 0.43 0.31 8
EERIZI EE o.s 22 0.79 20 0.59 15

0.31
0.31 8 1.69 43 8 0.24 6
EIESEESE 1.o6 27 0.83 21 0.79 20 0.35 9 1.97 50 0.55 14 0.43 11

EIEEIDESE 1.o6 27 0.83 21 0.63 16 0.35 9 1.81 46 0.43 11 0.31 8
EEIIJ IEEE3 1a3s 35 0.98 25 0.83 21 0.39 10 2.20 56 0.75 19 0.51 13
1 1/2
IEEE
X
1.3s 35 0.98 25 0.79 20 0.39 10 2.17 55 0.55 14 0.43 11
IESTEEE 1.s 50 1.02 26 0,98 25 0.63 16 2.64 67 0.94 24 0.67 17
IEEE SEE 1.s 50 1.02 26 0.83 21 0.63 16 2.48 63 0.75 19 0.51 13
IESEEE 1.s 50 1.02 26 0.79 20 0.63 16 2.44 62 0.55 14 0.43 11
EERIEESEED 2.44 62 1.06 27 1.02 26
1.50
0.67 17 2.76 70 38 1.18 30
JI IESEE 2.4 62 1.06 27 0.98 25 0.71 18 2.76 70 0.94 24 0.67 17

2 X 3/4 EDEES 2.4 62
21
1.06 27 0.83 0.67 17 2.60 65 0.75 19 0.51 13
2 X 1/2 EDEE 2.4 62 1.06 27 0.79 20 0.71 18 2.60 65 0.55 14 0.43 11

* Dimension «b» is nominal and is subject to normal manufacturing tolerances - «b» dimension nominate soumise aux tolerances norma/es de
fabrication
REDUCING COUPLING
2nchon r~cluit
Same dimensions as for couplings
Dimensions identiques a eel/es des manchons
[_ass3oooibs} 600o lbs.
Nominal pipe size 6000

Diam~tre nominal W( DU W( DU
3/8 X 1/4
inche EE
1.50 1.26
1/2 X 3/8
1.89 1.50 38
1/2 X 1/4
1.89 1.50 38
3/4 X 1/2
2.00 1.77 45
3/4 X 1/4
2.00 1.77 45
1 X 3/4
2.36 2.24 57
1 X 1/2
2.36 2.24 57
1 X 1/4
2.36 2.24 57
1 1/4 X 1
2.64 2.48 63
1 1/2 X 1
3.11 2.99 76
1 1/2 X 3/4
3.11 2.99 76
1 1/2 X 1/2
3.11 2.99 76
2 X 1 1/2
3.39 3.62 92
2 1/2 X 2 3.39 3.62 92
3.62 4.25 108
4.25 5.00 127
4.75 6.25 159
4.75 6.25 159
(11
Dimensions not listed in ASME B 16.11- 2009 and BS 3799- 1974 may vary according to the manufacturer.
( Dimensions non reprises dans ASME B 16.11 -2009 ET BS 3799- 1974, pouvant varier selon le fabricant.
10
~ELCORTE
~1r1r0[i"'i](§~
i
HEXAGONAL NIPPLE
lamelon t
E
Asurplat } A
---,t-- l·
C w
---=-1::- -
•J
r
A/F Hex.
Dimensions: BS 3799- 197 4
E
[_ass3oooibs} 600o lbs.
Nominal pipe
b »
size
A E C w
(mini) (mini) (mini) (mini) 3000 6000
Diam~tre
nominal
EEEEERIERHE EI
-- 0.43 11 0.39 10 0.24 6 1.02 26 0.20 5 0.08 2
-- 0.59 15 0.59 15 0.24 6 1.42 36 0.31 8 0.24 6
-- 0.71 18 0.63 16 0.31 8 1.57 40 0.43 11 0.31 8
-- 0.87 22 0.79 20 0.31 8 1.89 48 0.55 14 0.43 11
-- 1.06 27 0.83 21 0.39 10 2.05 52 0.75 19 0.51 13
-- 1.38 35 0.98 25 0.39 10 2.36 60 0.94 24 0.67 17
-- 1.97 50 1.02 26 0.63 16 2.68 68 1.50 38 1.18 30
-- 2.44 62 1.06 27 0.67 17 2.80 71 1.93 49 1.54 39
WELDING BOSS
Bossage ~ souder
From 1-4" to 2" 0=0.375 in
~
De1-4" 2" 0=9,5 mm
K l
Dimensions: BS 3799- 197 4
•
3000 - 6000
Nominal pipe K( M( N(
size
Diam~tre inches inches inches
nominal
~ 1.18 1.10 0.55

3/8 1.18 1.26 32,0 0.69
1.32 33,5 1.50 38,0 0.85 21,6
1.40 35,5 1.77 45 1.06 26,9
1.69 43,0 2.48 63 1.32 33,6
1.89 48,0 2.68 68 1.67 42,4

2.00
51,0
3.00
76 1.91
48,5
2.26
57,5
3.74
95 2.40
60,9
~ ELCO R TE
~1r1r0[i"'i](§~
@TH
R
Union
melle-femelle
[@ass 30@@Tbs] 6000 lbs.

l
Q
Dimensions: MSS SP 83-BS 3799

3000 6000
Nominal pipe Q0 R( Q0 R(
size
Diam~tre
nominal
EEE 1.67 45 1.42 36,0
EE
1.87 51 1.62 41,0 I
2.05 52 1.81 46,0 2.72 63 2.36 64,5
2.25 57 2.20 56,0 2.84 63 2.84 64,5
2.48 63 2.56 65,0 3.15 71 3.15 80,0
1 1/4 2.76 66 3.07 80,0 3.50 89 3.70 87,0
1 1/2 30.7 78 3.39 87,0 4.25 89 3.94 100,0
3.50 91 4.06 100,0 4.49 119 4.80 122,0
2 1/2 4.49 118 4.80 125,0 5.13 128 5.67 144,0
5.12 120 5.67 144,0 5.91 148 7.09 200,0
5.91 148 7.09 200,0
111 Dimensions may vary according to the manufacturer. Dimensions pouvant varier selon le fabricant.
EH
e Nd
Union
m~le-femelle
a

Thread: ANSI B 1 20.1-
1983
Nominal pipe
size
3000
L 6000
0 0 R( 0 0 R(
Diam~tre
nominal EEEEE
2.48 61,0 1.26 36,0
2.72 69,0 1.50 41,0
3.03 75,0 1.81 46,0 3.72 94,5 2.36 64,5
3.15 80,0 2.00 56,0 3.88 98,5 2.84 64,5
3.82 90,0 2.36 65,0 4.25 108,0 3.15 80,0
1 1/4 3.98 98,0 2.84 80,0 4.72 120,0 3.70 87,0
1 1/2 4.33 100,0 3.15 87,0 5.44 138,0 3.94 100,0
4.72 120,0 3.70 100,0 5.75 146,0 4.80 122,0
11
1 Dimensions may vary according to the manufacturer. Dimensions pouvant varier selon le fabricant.
13
JD.a...sa.• =Dr ys
WORKING PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING

Pression et temp~ratures de service
ASTM A 105
Carbon steel according to ANSI B 16. 11- 1980
Acier au carbone suivant ANSI B 16. 11-1980
Temp~ratures
2000 E32
SEC El
-29 ~ 38 -20 to 100 137,9 2000 206,9 000 413,8 6000
66 150 135,9 1970 203.4 2950 407,9 5915

93 200 133,8 1940 201,0 2915 402,0 5830
121 250 132,1 1915 198,3 2875 396,6 5750
149 300 130,7 1895 196,2 2845 392,4 5690

177 350 129,3 1875 193,8 2810 387,9 5625
204 400 127,6 1850 191,4 2775 382,8 5550

232 450 124,8 1810 187,2 2715 374,5 5430
260 500 119,7 1735 179,7 2605 359,3 5210

288 550 113,1 1640 169 7 2460 339,7 4925
316 600 106,2 1540 159,3 2310 318,6 4620

343 650 98,6 1430 148,3 2150 296,6 4300
371 700 90,0 1305 135,2 1960 270,3 3920
399 750 81,4 1180 122,4 1775 244,8 3550

427 800 70,0 1015 5,2 15 210,3 3050
Limite normale d'utilisation de l'acier au carb ne - Normal use limit of car on steel
454 850 57,2 830 5,2 12
J 172,4 2500
J
482 900 42,4 615 3,8 92 127,9 1855
510 950 29,3 d'utilisation de
Limite pratique 64 of ca bon steel88,6
425l'acier au carb ne4.1- Practical use limit 1285
62
~ ELCO R TE
~1r1r0[i"'i](§~
REDUCED TEES AND CROSSES 2 methods of designating outlets "-Attention... 2 possibilites (

T~s et croix r~duits
I
2
French method - Lecture fran~aise
2
Teduced tee,
Reduced crosses 3 T~s rduits
3 Croix r~duites
4 American method - Lecture am~ricaine
Reduced crosses Teduced tees

2 Croix r~duites Tes r~duits
3
(ll Unless otherwise required we will record your orders in accordance with the american method
Sauf sp~cification contraire de votre part nous enregistrons vos commandes suivant la lecture am~ricaine
LENGTH OF THREAD
Longueur de filetage
ASME B 16.11- 2009
Carbon steel according to ANSI B 16. 11- 1980
Acier au carbone suivant ANSI B 16. 11-1980
* B longueur minimum du filetage parfait.
La longueur de filetage utile ne doit pas ~tre inf~rieure ~ L2 T B
Dimension B is minimum length of perfect thread.

The length of useful thread shall not be less than
L2.
Internal thread - External thread - Filetage ext~rieur
Nomi Taraudage
nal pipe size
Diam B min. L2 min. Amin.
~tre nominal
1 0.25 0.2639 0.38
1/4 0.32 8, 1 0.4018 0.44
3/8 0.36 9, 1 0.4078 0.50
1/2 0.43 10,9 0.5337 0.56
3/4 0.50 12,7 0.5457 0.62
1 0.58 14,7 0.6828 0.75
1 1/4 0.67 17,0 0.7068 0.81
1 1/2 0.70 17,8 0.7235 0.81
2 0.75 19,0 0.7565 0.88
2 1/2 0.93 23,6 1.138 1.06
3 1.02 25,9 1.200 1.12
4 1.09 27,7 1.300 33,0 1.25
63
JD.a...sa.• =Dr ys
STANDARD TAPER PIPE THREAD (NPT}

Filetage conique pour tubes (NPT)
Normal engagement between male and female
threads to make tight joints according to
standards ANSI-B. 1.20.1 or API Std 5 B.
All the dimensions above correspond to the
American standards ANSI-B. 1.20.1 and API «t
I
standard 5B. Except for the nominal sizes 1/8"
and 1/4", for which E1 and L1 are not measured
on the same plan, according to API Std 5 B.
■ -;:· .:;_
r eferred to the
itch Effective Length Increase Length

meter threads of hand in diameter of wrench
ternal length tightening per thread tightening
d end
II E1 L2 L1 0.0625/n A
same plan.
IE.] Ii II inches inches inches inches inches
EE
1/8 0.405 27 0.03704 0.3635' -E 02639 0.1615 0.2726
1/4 0.540 18 0.05556 0.4773 -iL 04018 0.2278 0.3945
3/8 0.675 18 0.05556 0.61201 ijibe 0.4078 0.240 0.4067
1/2 0.840 14 0.07143 0.75843 0.77843 0.5337 3.320 0.00446 0.5343
3/4 1.050 14 0.07143 0.96768 0.98887 0.5457 0.339 0.00446 0.5533
1.315 11 1/2 0.08696 1.21363 1.23863 0.6828 0.400 0.00543 0.6609
1 1/4 1.660 11 1/2 0.08696 1.55713 1.58338 0.7068 0.420 0.00543 0.6809
1 1/2 1.900 11 1/2 0.08696 1.79609 1.82234 0.7235 0.420 0.00543 0.6809
2 2.375 11 1/2 0.08696 2.26902 2.29627 0.7565 0.436 0.00543 0.6969
2 1/2 2.875 8 0.12500 2.71953 2.76216 1.1375 0.682 0.00781 0.9320
3 3.500 8 0.12500 3.34062 3.38850 1.2000 0.766 0.00781 1.016
3 1/2 4.000 8 0.12500 3.83750 3.88881 1.2500 0.821 0.00781 1.071
4 4.500 8 0.12500 4.33438 4.38712 1.3000 0.844 0.00781 1.094
~
Engagement la cl~ des filetages m~le et
femelle suivant normes ANS/-8. 1.20.1 ou
AP/ Std 5 8.
Toutes les dimensions donn~es ci-dessus
correspondent aux normes am~ricaines ANSI- !
«t
B %
1.20.1 ou API Standard 5 B. Except~ pour

les dimensions nominales 1/8" et 1/4" ou E1
et L1 ne sont pas mesur~es sur le m~me
plan
■ ■ ■· - ■· - ■··
d'apr~s /'API Std 5B. Toutefois, ces dimensions
r amen~es su r le
.· - ■ ■·· ■· ■··
m ~m ep lan
·· ■
son t ide ntiques.
BS iii re 'HF sf.i] ?F ii 3fr
EEG
l
64
1/8 10,29 27 0,940 9,233 [ 9,489 6,103 4,102 0,0586 06,9

1/4 13,72 18 1.411 12,126 ] 12,,487 ] 10,205 5,786 0,0881 10
3/8 17,14 18 1,411 15,545 [ 15,926 l 10,358 6,096 0,0881 10,3
1/2 21,34 14 1,814 19,624 [ 19,772 I 13,556 8,128 0,1132 13,6
3/4 26,67 14 1,814 24,579 [ 25,117 I 13,860 8,610 0,1132 14, 1
33,40 11 1/2 2,209 30,826 [ 31,461 l 17,343 10,160 0, 1379 16,8
1 1/4 42,16 11 1/2 2,209 39,551 40.218 17,952 10,668 0, 1379 17,3
1 1/2 48,26 11 1/2 2,209 45,621 [ 46,287 l 18,377 10,668 0, 1379 17,3
2 60,32 11 1/2 2,209 57,633 [ 58,325 I 19,215 11,074 0, 1379 17,7
2 1/2 73,02 8 3,175 69,076 [ 70,159 I 28,892 17,322 0,1933 23,7
3 88,90 8 3,175 84,852 [ 86,068 l 30,480 19,456 0,1933 25,8
3 1/2 101,60 8 3,175 97,472 98,776 31,750 20,853 0,1933 27,2
4 114,30 8 3,175 110,093 111,433 33,020 21,437 0,1933 27,8
DeucOmTe
=Dr0NS ►
DELCORTE FRANCE PLANT
17 rue du Corbeau - Maubeuge 59600 FRANCE
& HEAD OFFICE
Tel. +33 (0) 327 691 414-Fax +33 (0) 327 691 423 - Mail:
info@delcorte.com www.delcorte.com
►
STAFI DISTRIBUTION GERMANY/ EAST & NORTH
EUROPE STAHLFITTINGS VERTRIEB AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
In der lllekatte 7-9-58339 BRECKERFELD - DEUTSCHLAND
Fax +49 (0) 23 31-91 89 33- Mail:
info@stafi.de www.stafi.de
►
DELCORTE - SORGUES/AVIGNON
DISTRIBUTION FRANCE/ SOUTH EUROPE
Zone lndustrielle-Avenue Bernard Palissy - 84700 SORGUES FRANCE
Tel. +33 (0) 490 39 15 51-Fax +33 (0) 490 83 47 69 - Mail: stock@delcorte.com
►
D.MEC- DELCORTE MIDDLE EAST CORPORATION
Bal~ik Mah. Kumtepe Mevki, 3273. Sokak No: 29 Gebze / KOCAEL, 41400 Turkey
Tel. +90 0 262 751 21 71 72-Fax +90 0 262 751 21
75 www.dmec.com.tr
GERMANY
DELCO
RTE
GD"I"ING
Head office
&plant
ZR7I.
o
I7
33
BOTII - WEII
HIGH PRESSURE FITTINGS
[F@RGED] CARBON
ALLOY STAINLESS
STEEL
THREADED SOCKETWELD
t #
BOTH-WELL STEEL FITTINGS CO.,

LTD.
NO.303 Rensin Road,Renwu District,Kaohsiung City,
Taiwan,R.0.C. (81460)
TEL : 886-7-371-1536 371-0497 372-0260
FAX : 886-7-371-3864 371-3882
FOIRGEI IIIGII PIRESSUIRE PIPE
FITTINGS
THREAIEI 2000-33000-6000 Lbs
ELBOW
4W' SQUARE
HEAD
COUPLING
90° PLUG
s HALF
' %»
ELBOW
ROUND
HEAD
COUPLING
'
45° 7 PLUG
REDUCING BULL
COUPLING PLUG
TEE
CAP BOSS
«d
CROSS
' 45 BRANCH
OUTLET OUTLET
STREET
ELBOW HEX
HEX
HEAD
NIPPLE
BUSHING
HEX SWAGE
UNION HEAD NIPPLE
PLUG
9
[9@° ElB@]
ASME B16.11-2011(Revision of ASME B16.11-2009)
Dimensions in Millimeters Dimensions in Millimeters.

Socket Welding
Nom. Nom. Length of Thread.
c" pl
DN Pipo B' A4 G J DN Pipe Min A G H
Size (Avg} I (Min) (Min) Size 8 L2 (Min)
(Min) 2000Lb
3000Lb
6 1/8 10.8 3.18 3.18 6.9 11.0 2.41 9.5 6 118 6.4 6.7 21 3.18 22
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 21 3.18 22
8 1/4 14.2 3.78 3.30 9.3 11.0 3.02
9.5
10 3/8 9.1 10.4 25 3.18 25
15 112 10.9 13.6 28 3.18 33
10 318 17.6 4.01 3.50 12.6 13.5 3.20 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 33 3.18 38
9.5 25 1 14.7 17.3 38 3.68 46
15 1/2 21.8 4.67 4.09 15.8 15.5 3.73 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 44 3.89 56
9.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 51 4.01 62
50 2 19.0 19.2 60 4.27 75
20 3/4 27.2 4.90 4.27 21.0 19.0 3.91 12.5
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 76 5.61 92
25 1 33.9 5.69 4.98 26.7 22.5 4.55 12.5 80 3 25.9 30.5 86 5.99 109
32 1-1/4 42.7 6.07 5.28 35.1 27.0 4.85 100 4 27.7 33.0 106 6.55 146
12.5 3000Lb I
6 1/8 6.4 6.7 21 3.18 22
40 1-1/2 48.8 6.35 5.54 40.9 32.0 5.08 12.5
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 25 3.30 25
50 2 61.2 6.93 6.04 52.5 38.0 5.54 16.0 10 318 9.1 10.4 28 3.51 33
65 2-1/2 73.9 8.76 7.67 62.7 41.0 7.01 16.0 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 33 4.09 38
20 3/4 12.7 13.9 38 4.32 46
80 3 89.8 9.52 8.30 78.0 57.0 7.62 16.0 25 1 14.7 17.3 44 4.98 56
100 4 115.2 10.69 9.35 102.3 66.5 8.56 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 51 5.28 62
19.0 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 60 5.56 75
50 2 19.0 19.2 64 7.14 84
6000Lb
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 83 7.65 102
6 1/8 10.8 3.96 3.43 4.0 11.0 3.15 9.5
80 3 25.9 30.5 95 8.84 121
8 1/4 14.2 4.60 4.01 6.4 13.5 3.68 100 4 27.7 33.0 114 11.18 152
9.5 6000Lb
32 318
10 1-1/4 42.7 5.03
17.6 7.92 4.37
6.93 29.5 15.5
9.2
6.35
32.0 4.01 12.5
9.5 6 118 6.4 6.7 25 6.35 25
40 1/2
15 1-1/2 48.8 5.97
21.8 7.80
8.92 5.18 34.0
11.8 38.0
19.0 7.14
4.78 12.5
9.5 8 1/4 8.1 10.2 28 6.60 33
50 3/4
2 61.2 10.92 9.50 42.9 41.0 8.74 16.0 10 3/8 9.1 10.4 33 6.98 38
20 27.2 6.96 6.04 15.6 22.5 5.56
15 112 10.9 13.6 38 8.15
12.5 46
9000Lb
25 1 33.9 7.92 6.93 20.7 27.0 6.35 12.5 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 44 8.53
56
20 314 27.2 9.78 8.56 11.1 28.5 7.82 12.5 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 60 10.59 75
25 1 33.9 11.38 9.96 15.2 32.0 9.09 12.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 64 11.07 84
50 2 19.0 19.2 83 12.09 102
32 1-1/4 42.7 12.14 10.62 22.8 35.0 9.70 12.5
15 1/2 21.8 9.35 8.18 6.4 25.5 7.47 9.5
25 1 14.7 17.3 51 9.93 62
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 95 15.29 121

40 1-1/2 48.8 12.70 11.12 28.0 38.0 10.15 12.5 16.64
80 3 25.9 30.5 106 146
50 2 61.2 13.84 12.12 38.2 54.0 11.07 16.0 100 4 27.7 33.0 114 18.67 152
(1) Average of socket Wa l Thickness around periphery shall Dimension B is minimum length ofperfect thread. The length
(el
be no less than listed values. The minimum values are of

permitted in localized areas. useful thread (B plus threads with fully formed roots and
(2) Tolerance see page 18. flat crests) shall not be less than L2 (effective length of
external thread) required by American National Standard
for pipe
11 threads (ANSI/ASME B1.20.1).
[45° TB@]
ASME B16.11-2011(Revision of ASME B16.11-2009)
Dimensions in Millimeters. Dimensions in Millimeters.

Socket Weldin ]Threaded l
DN Pipe B' c"" G J DN Pipe (Min) C G H
Size (Avg)
(Min)
(Min)
(Min)
Size 8 I La" (Min)
300OLb 2O0OLb
6 1/8 10.8 3.18 3.18 6.9 8.0 2.41 9.5 (1) Average of socket Wall Thickness around periphery shall be
no less than listed values. The minimum values are
8 1/4 14.2 3.78 3.30 9.3 8.0 3.02 9.5
permitted in localized areas.
10 3/8 17.6 4.01 3.50 12.6 8.0 3.20 9.5 (2) Tolerance see page 18.
15 1/2 21.8 4.67 4.09 15.8 11.0 3.73 9.5
20 3/4 27.2 4.90 4.27 21.0 13.0 3.91 12.5
25 1 33.9 5.69 4.98 26.7 14.0 4.55 12.5
32 1-1/4 42.7 6.07 5.28 35.1 17.5 4.85 12.5
40 1-1/2 48.8 6.35 5.54 40.9 20.5 5.08
12.5
50 2 61.2 6.93 6.04 52.5 25.5 5.54 16.0
65 2-1/2 73.9 8.76 7.67 62.7 28.5 7.01 16.0
80 3 89.8 9.52 8.30 78.0 32.0 7.62 16.0
100 4 115.2 10.69 9.35 102.3 41.0 8.56
19.0
600OLb
6 1/8 10.8 3.96 3.43 4.0 8.0 3.15 9.5
8 1/4 14.2 4.60 4.01 6.4 8.0 3.68 9.5
10 318 17.6 5.03 4.37 9.2 11.0 4.01 9.5
15 1/2 21.8 5.97 5.18 11.8 12.5 4.78 9.5
20 314 27.2 6.96 6.04 15.6 14.0 5.56
12.5
25 1 33.9 7.92 6.93 20.7 17.5 6.35 12.5
32 1-1/4 42.7 7.92 6.93 29.5 20.5 6.35
12.5
40 1-1/2 48.8 8.92 7.80 34.0 25.5 7.14 12.5
50 2 61.2 10.92 9.50 42.9 28.5 8.74 16.0
900OLb
15 1/2 21.8 9.35 8.18 6.4 15.5 7.47 9.5
20 3/4 27.2 9.78 8.56 11.1 19.0 7.82
12.5
25 1 33.9 11.38 9.96 15.2 20.5 9.09 12.5
32 1-1/4 42.7 12.14 10.62 22.8 22.5 9.70 12.5
40 1-1/2 48.8 12.70 11.12 28.0 25.5 10.15
12.5
50 2 61.2 13.84 12.12 38.2 28.5 11.07 16.0
6 1/8 6.4 6.7 17 3.18 15 112 10.9 13.6 25 4.09 38
22 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 28 4.32 46
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 17 3.18 25 1 14.7 17.3 33 4.98 56
22 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 35 5.28 62
10 318 9.1 10.4 19 3.18 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 43 5.56 75
25 50 2 19.0 19.2 44 7.14 84
15 112 10.9 13.6 22 3.18 33 65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 52 7.65 102
20 3/4 12.7 13.9 25 3.18 80 3 25.9 30.5 64 8.84 121
38 100 4 27.7 33.0 79 11.18 152
25 1 14.7 17.3 28 3.68 46 6000Lb
32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 33 3.89 6 1/8 6.4 6.7 19 6.35 25
56 8 1/4 8.1 10.2 22 6.60 33
40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 35 4.01 10 318 9.1 10.4 25 6.98 38
62 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 28 8.15 46
50 2 19.0 19.2 43 4.27 75 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 33 8.53 56
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 52 5.61 25 1 14.7 17.3 35 9.93 62
92 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 43 10.59 75
80 3 25.9 30.5 64 5.99 109 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 44 11.07 84
100 4 27.7 33.0 79 6.55 50 2 19.0 19.2 52 12.09 102
146 65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 64 15.29 121
3O0OLb [ 80 3 25.9 30.5 79 16.64 146
6 1/8 6.4 6.7 17 3.18 100 4 27.7 33.0 79 18.67 152
22 () Dimension B is minimum length ofperfect thread. The
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 19 3.30
length of useful thread (B plus threads with fully formed
25
10 318 9.1 10.4 22 3.51 roots and flat crests) shall not be less than L2 (effective
33 length of external
thread) required byAmerican
pipe National Standard tor
[7E]
ASME B16.11-2011 (Revision of ASME B16.11-2009)
D B
Dimensions in Dimensions in Millimeters

Millimeters. Socket Welding [Threaded [
Nom. Nom.
cl" Length of Thread.
DN Pipe
Size
B
(Avg) ] (Min)
o A G
(Min)
J
DN Pipe (Min) A G
(Min) H Size Bk" I L2" (Min)
2000Lb
3000Lb 6 1/8 6.4 6.7 21 3.18 22
6 1/8 10.8 3.18 3.18 6.9 11.0 2.41 9.5 8 1/4 8.1 10.2 21 3.18 22
8 1/4 14.2 3.78 3.30 9.3 11.0 3.02 9.5 10 3/8 9.1 10.4 25 3.18 25
15 1/2 10.9 13.6 28 3.18 33
10 318 17.6 4.01 3.50 12.6 13.5 3.20 9.5
20 3/4 12.7 13.9 33 3.18 38
15 1/2 21.8 4.67 4.09 15.8 15.5 3.73 9.5 25 1 14.7 17.3 38 3.68
46
25 1 33.9 5.69 4.98 26.7 22.5 4.55 12.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 51 4.01 62
32 1-1/4 42.7 6.07 5.28 35.1 27.0 4.85 12.5 50 2 19.0 19.2 60 4.27 75
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 76 5.61 92
40 1-1/2 48.8 6.35 5.54 40.9 32.0 5.08 12.5 3
80 25.9 30.5 86 5.99 109
50 2 61.2 6.93 6.04 52.5 38.0 5.54 16.0 100 4 27.7 33.0 106 6.55 146
65 2-1/2 73.9 8.76 7.67 62.7 41.0 7.01 16.0 3000Lb I
6 118 6.4 6.7 21 3.18 22
80 3 89.8 9.52 8.30 78.0 57.0 7.62 16.0
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 25 3.30 25
100 4 115.2 10.69 9.35 102.3 66.5 8.56 19.0 10 3/8 9.1 10.4 28 3.51 33
6000Lb 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 33 4.09 38
20 314 12.7 13.9 38 4.32 46
6 1/8 10.8 3.96 3.43 4.0 11.0 3.15 9.5
25 1 14.7 17.3 44 4.98 56
8 1/4 14.2 4.60 4.01 6.4 13.5 3.68 9.5 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 51 5.28 62
10 3/8 17.6 5.03 4.37 9.2 15.5 4.01 9.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 60 5.56 75
15 1/2 21.8 5.97 5.18 11.8 19.0 4.78 9.5 50 2 19.0 19.2 64 7.14 84
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 83 7.65 102
20 3/4 27.2 6.96 6.04 15.6 22.5 5.56 80 3 25.9 30.5 95 8.84 121
12.5
25 1 33.9 7.92 6.93 20.7 27.0 6.35 12.5 100 4 27.7 33.0 114 11.18 152
32 1-1/4 42.7 7.92 6.93 29.5 32.0 6.35 12.5 6000Lb
6 1/8 6.4 6.7 25 6.35 25
40 1-1/2 48.8 8.92 7.80 34.0 38.0 7.14 12.5
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 28 6.60 33
50 2 61.2 10.92 9.50 42.9 41.0 8.74 16.0 10 3/8 9.1 10.4 33 6.98 38
9000Lb 15 112 10.9 13.6 38 8.15 46
15 112 21.8 9.35 8.18 6.4 25.5 7.47 9.5
20 3/4 12.7 13.9 44 8.53
20 3/4 27.2 9.78 8.56 11.1 28.5 7.82 56 25 1 14.7 17.3 51 9.93
32
62 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 60 10.59 75
12.5
25 1 33.9 11.38 9.96 15.2 32.0 9.09 12.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 64 11.07 84
32 1-1/4 42.7 12.14 10.62 22.8 35.0 9.70 12.5 50 2 19.0 19.2 83 12.09 102
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 95 15.29 121
40 1-1/2 48.8 12.70 11.12 28.0 38.0 10.15 12.5
80 3 25.9 30.5 106 16.64 146
50 2 61.2 13.84 12.12 38.2 54.0 11.07 16.0 100 4 27.7 33.0 114 18.67 152
(1) Average of socket Wall Thickness around periphery shall be [ Dimension B is minimum length of perfect thread, The length
no less than listed values. The minimum values are of useful thread (B plus threads with fully formed roots and flat
permitted in localized areas. crests) shall not be less than L2 (effective length of external
(2) Tolerance see page 18. thread) required by American National Standard for pipe
[FuLE C@UP[NG]
ASME B16.11-2011 (Revision ofASME B16.11-2009)
g O
D
Dimensions in Millimeters. Dimensions in Millimeters

Socket ] Threaded L
Welding Nom. Length of Thread.

Nom. ON Pipe W 0
e
(Min)
ON Pipe B' c p? J
Size
Size (Avg) ] (Min) Bl" L2"
(Min) 3000Lb l
3000Lb 6 1/8 6.4 6.7 32 16
6 1/8 10.8 3.18 3.18 6.9 6.5 9.5 8 1/4 8.1 10.2 35 19
8 1/4 14.2 3.78 3.30 9.3 6.5 10 318 9.1 10.4 38 22
9.5
10 318 17.6 4.01 3.50 12.6 6.5 9.5 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 48 28
15 1/2 21.B 4.67 4.09 15.8 9.5 9.5 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 51
35
20 3/4 27.2 4.90 4.27 21.0 9.5 12.5
25 1 33.9 5.69 4.98 26.7 12.5 12.5 25 1 14.7 17.3 60 44
32 1-1/4 42.7 6.07 5.28 35.1 12.5 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 67 57
12.5
40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 79 64
40 1-1/2 48.8 6.35 5.54 40.9 12.5 12.5
50 2 19.0 19.2 86 76
50 2 61.2 6.93 6.04 52.5 19.0 16.0
65 2-1/2 73.9 8.76 7.67 62.7 19.0 16.0 65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 92 92
80 3 89.8 9.52 8.30 78.0 19.0 16.0 80 3 25.9 30.5 108 108
100 4 115.2 10.69 9.35 102.3 19.0 19.0 100 4 27.7 33.0 121 140
6000Lb 6000Lb
6 1/8 10.8 3.96 3.43 4.0 6.5 9.5
6 1/8 6.4 6.7 32
8 1/4 14.2 4.60 4.01 6.4 6.5 22
9.5
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 35
10 318 17.6 5.03 4.37 9.2 6.5 9.5 25
15 112 21.8 5.97 5.18 11.8 9.5 9.5
10 318 9.1 10.4 38 32
20 3/4 27.2 6.96 6.04 15.6 9.5 12.5
15 112 10.9 13.6 48 38
25 1 33.9 7.92 6.93 20.7 12.5 12.5
32 1-1/4 42.7 7.92 6.93 29.5 12.5 12.5 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 51 44
40 1-1/2 48.8 8.92 7.80 34.0 12.5 12.5 25 1 14.7 17.3 60 57

50 2 61.2 10.92 9.50 42.9 19.0 16.0 32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 67 64
9000Lb 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 79
15 1/2 21.8 9.35 8.18 6.4 9.5 9.5 76
20 3/4 27.2 9.78 8.56 11.1 9.5 12.5 50 2 19.0 19.2 86 92
25 1 33.9 11.38 9.96 15.2 12.5 12.5
65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 92 108
32 1-1/4 42.7 12.14 10.62 22.8 12.5
12.5 80 3 25.9 30.5 108 127
40 1-1/2 48.8 12.70 11.12 28.0 12.5 12.5 100 4 27.7 33.0 121 159
50 2 61.2 13.84 12.12 38.2 19.0 16.0
15
(1) Average of socket Wall Thickness around periphery shall be Dimension B is minimum length of perfect thread. The length
no less than listed values. The minimum values are of useful thread (B plus threads with fully formed roots and
permitted areas.
localized in flat
crests) shall not be less than L2? (effective length of external
(2) Tolerance see page 18. thread) required by American National Standard for pipe
(3) Reducer: "C, J, E" in accordance with large size. threads (ANS/ASME B1.20.1).
D" in accordance with small size.
The others in accordance with each size.
[CiP]
ASME B16.11-2011 (Revision of ASME B16.11-2009)
Dimensions in Millimeters Dimensions in Millimeters

Socket Welding [ Threaded ]
DN Pipe B' c K J DN Pipe (Min) p D G
Size (Avg) l (Min) (Min) Size Bt" t (Min)
(Min)
3000Lb I
3000Lb 6 1/8 6.4 6.7 19 16 4.8
6 1/8 10.8 3.18 3.18 4.8 9.5
8 1/4 8.1 10.2 25 19
8 1/4 14.2 3.78 3.30 4.8 9.5 4.8
10 3/8 17.6 4.01 3.50 4.8 9.5
10 3/8 9.1 10.4 25 22 4.8
15 1/2 21.8 4.67 4.09 6.4
9.5 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 32 28 6.4
20 3/4 27.2 4.90 4.27 6.4 12.5 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 37 35 6.4
25 1 33.9 5.69 4.98 9.6 12.5 1 41
25 14.7 17.3 44 9.7
32 1-1/4 42.7 6.07 5.28 9.6 12.5
32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 44 57 9.7
40 1-1/2 48.8 6.35 5.54 11.2 12.5
50 2 61.2 6.93 6.04 12.7 16.0 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 44 64 11.2
65 2-1/2 73.9 8.76 7.67 15.7 16.0 50 2 19.0 19.2 48 76 12.7
80 3 89.8 9.52 8.30 19.0 16.0 65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 60 92 15.7
100 4 115.2 10.69 9.35 22.4 19.0 80 3 25.9 30.5 65 108 19.0
6000Lb
100 4 27.7 33.0 68 140 22.4
6 1/8 10.8 3.96 3.43 6.4 9.5
8 1/4 14.2 4.60 4.01 6.4 9.5 6000Lb
10 3/8 17.6 5.03 4.37 6.4 9.5 8 1/4 8.1 10.2 27 25 6.4
15 1/2 21.8 5.97 5.18 7.9 9.5 10 3/8 9.1 10.4 27 32 6.4
20 3/4 27.2 6.96 6.04 7.9 12.5 15 1/2 10.9 13.6 33 38
25 1 33.9 7.92 6.93 11.2 12.5 7.9
32 1-1/4 42.7 7.92 6.93 11.2 12.5 20 3/4 12.7 13.9 38 44 7.9
40 1-1/2 48.8 8.92 7.80 12.7 12.5
25 1 14.7 17.3 43 57 11.2
50 2 61.2 10.92 9.50 15.7 16.0
32 1-1/4 17.0 18.0 46 64 11.2
9000Lb
15 1/2 21.8 9.35 8.18 11.2 9.5 40 1-1/2 17.8 18.4 48 76 12.7
20 3/4 27.2 9.78 8.56 12.7 12.5 50 2 19.0 19.2 51 92 15.7
25 1 33.9 11.38 9.96 14.2 12.5 65 2-1/2 23.6 28.9 64 108 19.0
32 1-1/4 42.7 12.14 10.62 14.2 12.5 80 3 25.9 30.5 68 127 22.4
40 1-1/2 48.8 12.70 11.12 15.7 12.5
100 4 27.7 33.0 75 159 28.4
50 2 61.2 13.84 12.12 19.0 16.0
()
(1) Average of socket Wall Thickness around perpihery shall be no Dimension B is minimum
e length of perfect thread. The length
of
less than listed values. The minimum values are permitted
useful thread (B plus threads with fully formed roots and
in localized areas.
(2) Tolerance see page 18 flat crests) shall not be less than L2 (effective length of
external thread) required by American National Standard
for pipe
threads (ANSI/ASME B1.20.1).
17
'E #Ni
$€83'5 683] - 7$5#88· s9Rs8
#LJ · EEI5EE&SO@ UeIt
=).(- it : 5 lt rt( it6# (- ·0 84 3035(81460)

@as : (07)3711536. 3710497. 3720260 [
F AX : (07)371-3864. 371-3882 [
E3LEET : 5ht rb # 5E 5 I ## 3162)
I3 463(
: (07)788-1179 '87-2303
WEB SITE: www.bothwell.com.tw

E-MAIL: bothwell@www.bothwell.com.tw
box@bothwell.com. tw
CAT. NO: 1307
Qatar Factory
Welded Fittings
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
BUTT-WELDED
Fittings & Flanges
Shieldg lobal .com

Introduction
SHIELD is a company created to cater to the infrastructure, fire
@
protection and building services industries with a comprehensive
quality. <@
APPROVED
LISTED
development.

in the industry in Europe, Asia and America in terms of quality and
delivery lead time. Our fully experienced and professional staff is
there to provide engineering expertise and after sales service
exactly when
you need it.

network of distribution centres around the world, you will find that
customer satisfaction is what we excel at.
We are justifiably proud of our global client base. With offices and
facilities in the UK and Middle East, we are able to comprehend
the specific needs of your particular region .
C€
. .... .
"'
Contents
PRODUCT PAGE
Butt-Welded Fittings 1
Wall Thickness 2
Elbows 3-5
90° Elbow Long Radius - SD-BLRE 90 3

90° Elbow Short Radius - SD-BSRE 90 5
Equal & Cross Tees 6
Equal Tee - SD-BET 6

Cross Tee - SD-BCT 6
Reducers 7 - 14
Reducer Tee - SD-BRT 7

Reducer Cross - SD-BRC 7
Concentric Reducer - SD-BCOR 10
Eccentric Reducer - SD-BECR 10
Reducing Elbow - SD-BRE 90 13
Bends 15 - 16
180° Bend Long Radius - SD-BLRB 180 15

180° Bend Short Radius - SD-BSRB 180 16
End Cap 17
End Cap - SD-BCP 17
Flanges 18- 26
Flanges 18
Blind Flange - SD-BF 150- Class 150 18
Blind Flange - SD-BF 300 - Class 300 19
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF 150- Class 150 20
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF 300 - Class 300 21
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF 150- Class 150 22
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF 300 - Class 300 23
Blind Flange - SD-BF-PN 10, 16 & 25 24
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF - PN 10, 16 & 25 25
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF - PN 10, 16 & 25 26
Shield
Butt-Welded
Fittings
Butt-welded fittings are used in a piping system for changing
direction, branching and to mechanically joined to the system. A Manufacturing
piping system using Butt-welded fittings has many inherent
advantages over other forms. Butt-welded fittings are used widely
Process
in high pressure and high temperature application. Forging or shaping operations are
performed by hammering, pressing,
piercing, extruding, upsetting, rolling,
bending, fusion welding or by
combination of two or more of these
operations.
Heat
Treatment
Material Hot-formed WPB fittings, upon
Material specification is totally in compliance with ASTM A 234. which the final forming operation is
This standard covers wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless and completed at a temperature
welded construction which are manufactured to the dimensional
above
specifications of ASME B16.9. These fittings are primarily for use
in pressure piping and in pressure vessel fabrication for service 1150 °F (620 °C) and below 1800
at moderate and elevated temperatures. The starting material for °F
fittings consist of killed (deoxidized) steel, forgings, bars, plates; (980 °C), need not be heat-treated
seamless or fusion-welded tubular products with filler metal added
(provided they are cooled in air).
and conform to the Mechanical & Chemical requirements of ASTM A
234. Cold-Formed WPB fittings, upon
which the final forming operation
is completed at a temperature
Dimensions below
Butt-welded fittings are manufactured in accordance with this 1150 °F (620 °C), and normalized, or
specification conforms to the dimensions and tolerances given in
stress relieved at 1100 °F (595 °C) to
the latest revision of ASME B16.9 & B16.28.
1275 °F (690 °C}.
Chemical Requirements (in %):

REIT- A± = •
o.3o ]o2o-1.o6] o.0so] o.ose ] o.1o] o4o] o.1s] o4o] o.4o] o.oe
Mechanical
Requirements:
Tensile Strength Yield Strength
(min) (min)
60,000 psi 35,000 psi

Note: SHIELD reserves the right to change the contents without notice.
Butt-welded Fittings
Wall
Thickness
Schedule of Wall Thickness
Nominal Pipe Wall Thickness (mm)
Size
SCH 40 SCH STD
(inch)
¼ 2.24 2.24 3.02
½ 2.77 2.77 3.73
¾ 2.87 2.87 3.91
1 3.38 3.38 4.55
1-/% 3.56 3.56 4.85
1-%% 3.68 3.68 5.08
2 3.91 3.91 5.54
2-½ 5.16 5.16 7.01
3 5.49 5.49 7.62
3-½ 5.74 5.74 8.08
4 6.02 6.02 8.56
5 6.55 6.55 9.52
6 7.11 7.11 10.97
8 8.18 8.18 12.70
10 9.27 9.27 12.70
12 10.31 9.52 12.70
14 11.13 9.52 12.70
16 12.70 9.52 12.70
18 14.27 9.52 12.70
20 15.09 9.52 12.70
24 17.48 9.52 12.70
26 9.52 12.70
28 9.52 12.70
30 9.52 12.70
32 9.52 12.70
34 9.52 12.70
36 9.52 12.70
38 9.52 12.70
40 9.52 12.70
42 9.52 12.70
44 9.52 12.70
46 9.52 12.70
48 9.52 12.70
Shield
90°Elbow
A I
~-----1
I
I
'
Long Radius 0
Model : SD-BLRE 90
Functions:
The function of the elbow is to change direction or flow in a piping

system. Elbows are split as follows, the distance over which they change
direction; the centre line of one end to the opposite face, this is known as the
D
"centre to face" distance and is equivalent to the radius through which the
elbow is bent.
Material: ASTM A234 Grade

WPB
Dimension: ASME
B16.9
½ 21.30 38.0
0
¾ 26.70 38.0
0
f 33.40 38.0
1-¼ 0
42.20 48.0
1-%% 0
48.30 57.0
2 60.30 0
76.0
2-½ 0
73.00 95.0
0
3 88.90 114.0
3-½ 0
101.60 133.0
0
4 114.30 152.0
0
5 141.30 190.0
0
6 168.30 229.0
A pipe fitting is 8 219.10 0

305.0
0
10 273.00 381.0
defined as a part 12 323.80 0
457.0
0
used in a piping
14 355.60 533.0
0
16 406.40 610.0
system to change 18 457.00 0

686.0
0
20 508.00 762.0
direction or 22 559.00 0
838.0
function and to 24 610.00 0

914.0
0
26 660.00 991.0
mechanically 28 711.00 0
1067.0
0
joined to the 30
32
762.00
813.00
1143.0
0
1219.0
system. 34 864.00 0
1295.0
0
36 914.00 1372.0
0
38 965.00 1448.0
0
40 1016.00 1524.0
0
42 1067.00 1600.0
0
44 1118.00 1676.0
0
46 1168.00 1753.0
48 1219.00 0
1829.0
0
Shield
45°Elbow
Long Radius
Model : SD-BLRE 45
Functions:
The function of a 45° elbow is the same as a 90° elbow, but the measurement of
dimensions. The radius of a 45° elbow is the same as the radius of the 90° L.R. elbow where
'RR' equals 1-½ D. However, the centre to face dimension is measured from each face to the o
point of intersection of the centre lines perpendicular to each other. This is due to the smaller
degree of bend.

WPB
Dimension: ASME
B16.9
Nominal Pipe Outside Diameter Centre to End

Size D (mm) B (mm)
(inch)
½ 21.30 16.00
¾ 26.70 19.00
1 33.40 22.00
1-¼ 42.20 25.00
1-%% 48.30 29.00
2 60.30 35.00
2-½ 73.00 44.00
3 88.90 51.00
3-½ 101.60 57.00
4 114.30 64.00
5 141.30 79.00
6 168.30 95.00
8 219.10 127.00
10 273.00 159.00
12 323.80 190.00
14 355.60 222.00
16 406.40 254.00
18 457.00 286.00
20 508.00 318.00
22 559.00 343.00
24 610.00 381.00
26 660.00 406.00
28 711.00 438.00
30 762.00 470.00
32 813.00 502.00
34 864.00 533.00
36 914.00 565.00
38 965.00 600.00
40 1016.00 632.00
42 1067.00 660.00
44 1118.00 695.00
46 1168.00 727.00
48 1219.00 759.00
Shield
90°Elbow
A
Short Radius
l
0 \
Model · SD-BSRE 90
Functions:
A Short radius elbow gives a sharpen turn to the piping system as compared
to long radius elbow. Short radius elbow is less in space consumption than
long
D
radius elbow, cost effective and high efficiency.
Material: ASTM A234 Grade WPB

Dimension: ASME B16.9 & B16.28
Nominal Pipe Outside Centre to End

Size Diameter
(inch)
D (mm)
1
33.40
1-%% 42.20
1-% 48.30
2 60.30
2-% 73.00
3 88.90
3-% 101.60
4 114.30
5 141.30
6 168.30
8 219.10
10 273.00
12 323.80
14 355.60
16 406.40
18 457.00
20 508.00
22 559.00
24 610.00
p p n g System
Shield
Equal&
Cross Tee
Model (Equal): SD-BET
Functions:
The function of a tee is to permit flow at 90° to the main direction of flow. The main flow passes through the 'run' while the 90° outlet
is known as the 'branch'. The equal tee is manufactured with all three outlets being the same size.
Model (Cross): SD-BCT

Function:
The function of a cross is similar to that of equal tee with the exception of providing two 90° outlets opposite each other. Equal
crosses have all four outlets of equal size.
Material: ASTM A234 Grade WPB
Nominal Outside Diameter Centre to End
Dimension: ASME B16.9
Pipe D (mm) C (mm) M (mm)
Size (inch)
½ 21.30 25.00 25.00
D
¾ 26.70 29.00 29.00
---------
J
33.40 38.00 38.00
1-%% 42.20 48.00 48.00
1-% 48.30 57.00 57.00
2 60.30 64.00 64.00
D --- ---
2-%% 73.00 76.00 76.00
3 88.90 86.00 86.00
C C
3-% 101.60 95.00 95.00
Equal Tee 4 114.30 105.00 105.00
5 141.30 124.00 124.00
6 168.30 143.00 143.00
D
'I 8 219.10 178.00 178.00
I
--------- 10 273.00 216.00 216.00
12 323.80 254.00 254.00
M 14 355.60 279.00 279.00
16 406.40 305.00 305.00
--- -- - -D
18 457.00 343.00 343.00
I
20 508.00 381.00 381.00
M I
22 559.00 419.00 419.00
I I
I 24 610.00 432.00 432.00
I
---i-------
I
26 660.00 495.00 495.00
C C
28 711.00 521.00 521.00
Cross Tee 30 762.00 559.00 559.00
32 813.00 597.00 597.00
34 864.00 635.00 635.00
36 914.00 673.00 673.00
38 965.00 711.00 711.00
40 1016.00 749.00 749.00
42 1067.00 762.00 711.00
44 1118.00 813.00 762.00
46 1168.00 851.00 800.00
48 1219.00 889.00 838.00
Shield
Reducer Tee
&Cross \
(
Model (fee) : SD-BRT \

& Model (Cross) : SD- p n g System
BRC
Functions
=
:
The reducing tee is manufactured with the Outside Diameter
Nominal Pipe
branch outlet smaller than the run to
obtain the desired flow and pressure
Size (inch)
i
through the system. ½x¼ 21.30 13. 70 25.00 25.00
Material: ASTM
A234 % 21.30 17.30 25.00 25.00
Grade WPB
¾x¾ 26.70 17.30 29.00 29.00
Dimension: ASME B16.9 ¾x½ 26.70 21.30 29.00 29.00
1x ½ 33.40 21.30 38.00 38.00
1x%% 33.40 26.70 38.00 38.00
D1
1-¼x½ 42.20 21.30 48.00 48.00
1-¼x¾ 42.20 26.70 48.00 48.00
1-¼ x 1 42.20 33.40 48.00 48.00
1-½x ½ 48.30 21.30 57.00 57.00
M
1-½x¾ 48.30 26.70 57.00 57.00
1-½ x 1 48.30 33.40 57.00 57.00
D 1-½ X 1-¼ 48.30 42.20 57.00 57.00
1--- 2x¾ 60.30 26.70 64.00 44.00
~---- ----~1
C C I 2x1 60.30 33.40 64.00 51.00
Reducer Tee
2 X 1-¼ 60.30 42.20 64.00 57.00
2 X 1-½ 60.30 48.30 64.00 60.00
2-½ x 1 73.00 33.40 76.00 57.00
D1
2-½ X 1-¼ 73.00 42.20 76.00 64.00
2-½ X 1-½ 73.00 48.30 76.00 67.00
2-½x2 73.00 60.30 76.00 70.00
M
3 X 1-¼ 88.90 42.20 86.00 70.00
3 X 1-½ 88.90 48.30 86.00 73.00
D 3x2 88.90 60.30 86.00 76.00
3x2-½ 88.90 73.00 86.00 83.00
I
3-½ X 1-½ 101.60 48.30 95.00 79.00
M :
I 3-½x2 101.60 60.30 95.00 83.00
I
--~------- "=:=:::t:=7 3-½x3 101.60 88.90 95.00 92.00

I~--------~
I
C C 4 X 1-½ 114.30 48.30 105.00 86.00
Reducer Cross
4x2 114.30 60.30 105.00 89.00
4x2-½ 114.30 73.00 105.00 95.00
4x3 114.30 88.90 105.00 98.00
4x 3-% 114.30 101.60 105.00 102.00
5x 2 141.30 60.30 124.00 105.00
5x2-½ 141.30 73.00 124.00 108.00
5x3 141.30 88.90 124.00 111.00
Shield
Reducer Tee
&Cross
Model (fee) : SD-BRT
& Model (Cross) : SD-BRC
a . s meo
eeks9
Nom inal Pipe
Size (inch)
Outside Diameter
u
5x 3-% 141.30 101.60 124.00
5x 4 141.30 114.30 114.00
124.00
6x 2-% 168.30 73.00 117.00
143.00
6x3 168.30 88.90 121.00
143.00
6x3-% 168.30 101.60 124.00
143.00
6x4 168.30 114.30 127.00
143.00
6x5 168.30 141.30 130.00
143.00
8x3-% 219.10 101.60 137.00
178.00
8x 4 219.10 114.30 152.00
178.00
8x5 219.10 141.30 156.00
178.00
8x 6 219.10 168.30 162.00
178.00
10 X 4 273.00 114.30 216.00 184.00
D1
10 X 5 273.00 141.30 216.00 191.00
10 X 6 273.00 168.30 216.00 194.00
10 X 8 273.00 219.10 216.00 203.00
M
12 X 5 323.80 141.30 254.00 216.00
12 X 6 323.80 168.30 254.00 219.00
12 X 8 323.80 219.10 254.00
D 229.00
12 X 10 323.80 273.00 254.00 241.00
1--- 14 X 6 355.60 168.30 279.00 238.00
~-
~1
---
C
----
C I
14 X 8 355.60 219.10 279.00 248.00
14 X 10 355.60 273.00 279.00 257.00
Reducer Tee
16x
14 6
X 12 406.40
355.60 168.30
323.80 305.00
279.00 264.00
270.00
D1 16x 8 406.40 219.10 305.00 273.00
16x 10 406.40 273.00 305.00 283.00
16x 12 406.40 323.80 305.00 295.00
16x 14 406.40 355.60 305.00 305.00
18 X 8 457.00 219.10 343.00 298.00
M
18 X 10 457.00 273.00 343.00 308.00
18 X 12 457.00 323.80 343.00
D 321.00
18 X 14 457.00 355.60 343.00 330.00
18 x 16 457.00 406.40 343.00 330.00
I
20 X 8 508.00 219.10 381.00 324.00
M : 20 X 10 508.00 273.00 381.00 333.00
I
I 20 X 12 508.00 323.80 381.00 346.00
I 's:=:::t:=7
20 X 14 508.00 355.60 381.00 356.00
--~------- ------ ~
I~--
I
C 20 x 16 508.00 406.40 381.00 356.00
C
20 X 18 508.00 457.00 381.00 368.00
Reducer Cross
22 X 10 559.00 273.00 419.00 359.00
22 X 12 559.00 323.80 419.00 371.00
22 X 14 559.00 355.60 419.00 381.00
22 x 16 559.00 406.40 419.00 381.00
22 X 18 559.00 457.00 419.00 394.00
22x20 559.00 508.00 419.00 406.00
I ""
24 X 10 610.00 273.00 432.00 384.00
24 X 12 610.00 323.80 432.00 397.00
610.00 355.60 432.00 406.00
ss,ew ,~,o~ '"" o,s ID ~~,, "'° oo~o<s •''"'"' ,,,~ 24 X 14
Shield
Reducer Tee
&Cross
Model (fee) : SD-BRT
Nominal Pipe
Size (inch)
24 x 16
mom
Outside Diameter
610.00 406.40
=[
432.00 406.00
24 x 18 610.00 457.00 432.00 419.00
24x20 610.00 508.00 432.00 432.00
24x22 610.00 559.00 432.00 432.00
26 x12 660.00 323.80 495.00 422.00
26 x 14 660.00 355.60 495.00 432.00
26 x 16 660.00 406.40 495.00 432.00
26 x 18 660.00 457.00 495.00 444.00
26x20 660.00 508.00 495.00 457.00
26 X 22 660.00 559.00 495.00 470.00
26x24 660.00 610.00 495.00 483.00
711.00 323.80 521.00 448.00 D1
28 x12
28 x 14 711.00 355.60 521.00 457.00 ----------
28 x 16 711.00 406.40 521.00 457.00

28 x 18 711.00 457.00 521.00 470.00
M
28x20 711.00 508.00 521.00 483.00
28 X 22 711.00 559.00 521.00 495.00
28x24 711.00 610.00 521.00 508.00 --- --- - D
28x26 711.00 660.00 521.00 521.00
30 x 10 762.00 273.00 559.00 460.00 1---
I
30 x12 762.00 323.80 559.00 473.00 C C I
30 x 14 762.00 355.60 559.00 483.00 Reducer Tee

30 x 16 762.00 406.40 559.00 483.00
30 x 18 762.00 457.00 559.00 495.00
30x20 762.00 508.00 559.00 508.00 D1
30 X 22 762.00 559.00 559.00 521.00 ----------
30x24 762.00 610.00 559.00 533.00
30x26 762.00 660.00 559.00 546.00 M
30 X 28 762.00 711.00 559.00 546.00
32 x 14 813.00 355.60 597.00 508.00
32 x 16 813.00 406.40 597.00 508.00 D
32 x 18 813.00 457.00 597.00 521.00
32x20 813.00 508.00 597.00 533.00
I
32 X 22 I
813.00 559.00 597.00 546.00 M
32x24 I I
813.00 610.00 597.00 559.00
I
I
32x26 813.00 660.00 597.00 572.00 I
--r-------
32 X 28 813.00 711.00 597.00 572.00 I
I C C
32x30 813.00 762.00 597.00 584.00
34 x 16 864.00 406.40 635.00 533.00 Reducer Cross
34 x 18 864.00 457.00 635.00 546.00

34x20 864.00 508.00 635.00 559.00
34x22 864.00 559.00 635.00 572.00
34x24 864.00 610.00 635.00 584.00
34x26 864.00 660.00 635.00 597.00
34x28 864.00 711.00 635.00 597.00
34x30 864.00 762.00 635.00 610.00
34 x 32 864.00 813.00 635.00 622.00
Concentric
Shield
& Eccentric
Reducer
Model (Concentric) : SD-BCOR
& Model (Eccentric) : SD-BECR
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter End to end
Functions:
(inch) D (mm) D1 (mm) (mm)
A reducer is a fitting that
can ¾x¾ 26.7 17.3 38
be used to connect
between two different sizes ¾x½ 26.7 21.3 38
concentric
of pipes. A reducer shapes 1x ½ 33.4 21.3 51
like a cone where eccentric 1x%% 33.4 26.7 51
reducer has an edge which is 1-¼x½ 42.2 21.3 51
parallel to the joining pipe, this
parallel edge outcomes in the 1-¼x¾ 42.2 26.7 51
two pipes having balanced 1-¼ x 1 42.2 33.4 51
centre lines. 1-½x ½ 48.3 21.3 64
Material: ASTM A234 1-½x¾ 48.3 26.7 64
Grade WPB 1-½ x 1 48.3 33.4 64
1-½ X 1-¼ 48.3 42.2 64
Dimension: ASME
B16.9 2x¾ 60.3 26.7 76
2x1 60.3 33.4 76
2 X 1-¼ 60.3 42.2 76
2 X 1-½ 60.3 48.3 76
H I
2-½ x 1 73.0 33.4 89
-"
I
I
I
I_-- 2-½ X 1-¼ 73.0 42.2 89
2-½ X 1-½ 73.0 48.3 89
D - - - - 2-½x2 73.0 60.3 89
D1 3 X 1-¼ 88.9 42.2 89
3 X 1-½ 88.9 48.3 89
3x2 88.9 60.3 89
3x2½ 88.9 73.0 89
Concentric Reducer
3-½ X 1-¼ 101.6 42.2 102
3-½ X 1-½ 101.6 48.3 102
3-½x2 101.6 60.3 102
3-½ X 2-½ 101.6 73.0 102
H 3-½x3 101.6 88.9 102
4 X 1-½ 114.3 48.3 102
4x2 114.3 60.3 102
D 4x2-½ 114.3 73.0 102
4x3 114.3 88.9 102
D1
4x 3-% 114.3 101.6 102
5x2 141.3 60.3 127
Eccentric Reducer
5x2-½ 141.3 73.0 127
5x3 141.3 88.9 127
5x3-% 141.3 101.6 127
5x 4 141.3 114.3
6x2-½ 168.3 73.0
6x3 168.3 88.9
6x3-% 168.3 101.6
6x4 168.3 114.3
6x 5 168.3 141.3
8x3-% 219.1 101.6
8x 4 219.1 114.3
8x 5 219.1 141.3
Shield H H
Concentric & D 1------ D1 D
Eccentri
---
Reducer
--- D1
Model (Concentric) : SD-BCOR Concentric Reducer Eccentric Reducer

(inch) D (mm) D1 (mm) H (mm)
8x 6 219.1 168.3 152
10 X 4 273.0 114.3 178
I
10 X 5 273.0 141.3 178
10 X 6 273.0 168.3 L 178
10 X 8 273.0 219.1 I 178
12 X 5 323.8 141.3
203
12 X 6 323.8 168.3 I 203
12 X 8 323.8 219.1
203
12 X 10 323.8 273.0 L 203
14 X 6 355.6 168.3 I
330
14 X 8 355.6 219.1
330
14 X 10 355.6 273.0 I:
14 X 12 355.6 323.8 330
16 X 8 406.4 219.1 330
L
16 X 10 406.4 273.0 356
I
16 X 12 406.4 323.8 356
16 X 14 406.4 355.6 356
I!
18 X 10 457.0 273.0 I
356
18 X 12 457.0 323.8 381
18 X 14 457.0 355.6 I 381
18 X 16 457.0 406.4 381
20 X 12 508.0 323.8 L 381
20 X 14 508.0 355.6 I 508
20 X 16 508.0 406.4
508
20 X 18 508.0 457.0 I 508
22 X 14 559.0 355.4
508
22 X 16 559.0 406.4 L 508
22 X 18 559.0 457.0 I
22 X 20 559.0 508.0 508
24 X 16 610.0 406.4 508
I:
24 X 18 610.0 457.0 508
24x20 610.0 508.0 508
L
24x22 610.0 559.0 I
508
26 X 18 660.0 457.0 508
26 X 20 660.0 508.0 L 508
26 X 22 660.0 559.0 I 610
26 X 24 660.0 610.0 610
28 X 18 711.0 457.0 I 610
28 X 20 711.0 508.0
610
28 X 24 711.0 610.0 L 610
28 X 26 711.0 660.0 I
30 X 20 762.0 508.0 610
30 X 24 762.0 610.0 610
I:
30 X 26 762.0 660.0 610
30 X 28 762.0 711.0 610
L
32 X 24 813.0 610.0 610
610
610
610
Shield H H
Concentric &
I
1~-----
Eccentric Reducer
D1 D
D1
D
Model (Concentric) : SD-BCOR Concentric Eccentric Reducer

Reducer

(inch) D (mm) D1 (mm) H (mm)
32 X 26 813.0 660.0
32 X 28 813.0 711.0
32 X 30 813.0 762.0
34 X 24 864.0 610.0
34 X 26 864.0 660.0
34 X 30 864.0 762.0
34 X 32 864.0 813.0
36 X 24 914.0 610.0
36 X 26 914.0 660.0
36 X 30 914.0 762.0
36 X 32 914.0 813.0
36 X 34 914.0 864.0
38 X 26 965.0 660.0
38 X 28 965.0 711.0
38 X 30 965.0 762.0
38 X 32 965.0 813.0
38 X 34 965.0 864.0
38 X 36 965.0 914.0
40 X 30 1016.0 762.0
40 X 32 1016.0 813.0
40 x34 1016.0 864.0
40 X 36 1016.0 914.0
40 X 38 1016.0 965.0
42 X 30 1067.0 762.0
42 X 32 1067.0 813.0
42 x34 1067.0 864.0
42 X 36 1067.0 914.0
42 X 38 1067.0 965.0
42 x40 1067.0 1016.0
44 X 36 1118.0 914.0
44 X 38 1118.0 965.0
44 x40 1118.0 1016.0
44 x42 1118.0 1067.0
46 X 38 1168.0 965.0
46 x40 1168.0 1016.0
46 x 42 1168.0 1067.0
46 x44 1168.0 1118.0
48 x40 1219.0 1016.0
48 x 42 1219.0 1067.0
48 x44 1219.0 1118.0
48 x 46 1219.0 1168.0
Shield 1----A
Reducing
,_I _
I
0/1
8
---
Elbow
I
- -
- 0
I
I
I /
Model · SD-BRE 90 l
(
Functions ---
: '
D1
90° Reducing elbow is to change direction or flow in a piping system from one size to
another size. The Reducing Elbows have got different sized openings on both the
end and hence can fit into two different pipes of varying end openings.

WPS
Dimension: ASME
B16.9
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Centre to E

(inch) D (mm) D1 (mm) A (mm)
2x1 60.30 33.40 76.00

2 X 1-¼ 60.30 42.20 76.00
2 X 1-½ 60.30 48.30 76.00
2-½ X 1-¼ 73.00 42.20 95.00
2-½ X 1-½ 73.00 48.30 95.00
2-½x 2 73.00 60.30 95.00
3 X 1-½ 88.90 48.30 114.00
3x2 88.90 60.30 114.00
3 x2-½ 88.90 73.00 114.00
3-½x 2 101.60 60.30 133.00
3-½ X 2-½ 101.60 73.00 133.00
3-½x3 101.60 88.90 133.00
4x2 114.30 60.30 152.00
4x2-½ 114.30 73.00 152.00
4x3 114.30 88.90 152.00
4x3-% 114.30 101.60 152.00
5 x2-½ 141.30 73.00 190.00
5x3 141.30 88.90 190.00
5 x3-½ 141.30 101.60 190.00
5x 4 141.30 114.30 190.00
6x3 168.30 88.90 229.00
6x3-% 168.30 101.60 229.00
6x4 168.30 114.30 229.00
6x5 168.30 141.30 229.00
8x 4 219.10 114.30 305.00
8x5 219.10 141.30 305.00
8x6 219.10 168.30 305.00
10 X 5 273.00 141.30 381.00
10 X 6 273.00 168.30 381.00
10 X 8 273.00 219.10 381.00
12 X 6 323.80 168.30 457.00
Shield I
A I
I
Reducing
I
/
I 8
---
Elbow
- - - 0
I /
/ ----
I /
I /
l
Model : SD-BRE 90 (
---
I
D1
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Centre to End

(inch) A (mm)
D (mm) D1 (mm)
12 X 8 323.80 219.10 457

12 X 10 323.80 273.00 457
14 X 8 355.60 219.10 533
14 X 10 355.60 273.00 533
14 X 12 355.60 323.80 533
16x 10 406.40 273.00 610
16x 12 406.40 323.80 610
16x 14 406.40 355.60 610
18 X 10 457.00 273.00 686
18 X 12 457.00 323.80 686
18 X 14 457.00 355.60 686
18 x 16 457.00 406.40 686
20 X 10 508.00 273.00 762
20 X 12 508.00 323.80 762
20 X 14 508.00 355.60 762
20 x 16 508.00 406.40 762
20 X 18 508.00 457.00 762
24 X 12 610.00 323.80 914
24 X 14 610.00 355.60 914
24 x 16 610.00 406.40 914
24 X 18 610.00 457.00 914
24x20 610.00 508.00 914
24x22 610.00 559.00 914
I
, ,
f ) [ I
\ , , ,
\ ' ' '
\\
, \
\.
\ (4 ( \
) ) I
l \'
\
'
/ r \\
'
/7 /
\I
'
J
,
p I p I n g s y s e m
Shield range of Buttwelded Fittings & Flanges please contact
your nearest office.
United Kingdom
Redburn House, 2A Tonbridge Road,
Romford, Essex, RM3 8QE, United
Kingdom.
Email: Shielduk@shieldglobal.com
Tel : +44 1708 377731
Fax: +44 1708 347637
A
A ,--
•
o
SHIELD
O
LL
LL
www.shieldglobal.com co
0
0
Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
(Carbon and Aly Stcet)
90 Ebow ILongl 180EIbow ILongl Reducer {Cancentrir)
9 Elbow
{Short ]reducing] Reducer (Eccentric)
Stainless Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
45 Elbow (Long) Cap
90 Elbow IL.ongl T [Straight) Lap Joint Stub End
T (Reducing) Reducer [Eccentric)
7
Wall Thick ness Schedules
Norin,at Owtsicdr
Norenal Wat Thickness
I
Poe Sae Daveter
.
, e JS ANS 5et 55 Sch 10$ $ct 20S Gs Sch 10 LG0.9 sch 20 Sen 30 STD
8 /4 13.8 137 12 --- --

1.65 2.0
·-
2.3
. - «
- - 42.2)
i
• - e5
0 3/8 17 .3
.
71 1.2
-
2.3
1.65 20
-- •
4 a 1 65 21 7.5 2.8 - - - - I2.9)
32
40
' A
1
42 7 42 2
-
3.5
'-
.65 2.8 30
-~- --1~
- - -
.
(3.6l
.c
(3.71
2 48.6 48 ,6s 2.8 30 3.5 - - -
50 2 60 5 60 65 2.8
- ,__35 3.8 - - - - 3.9l
6 21 2 ) 30 21 3.0 3s 42 - - - . (5.2
a0 3 89 1 88 9
-·- - ,_ _
2 . 45.5)
3 .0 4¢ 4.2 - - - -
1
-
----
31 101 10' 2.1 3.0 4.0 4.2 - - - I 45.7
~ I 1 1
1 -' 21 3.0 4.0 4.5 - - - - 46.0
12s s 139.8 141.3 28 34 $.0
- 4.5 - - - - 46.6)
150 6 165.2 168.3 2.8 34 5.0 5.0 - 5.0°° - - 47.41
175
20
1 90.7
216.3
-
219.
- . - 5.3
5.8
-
- -- 5.8° 64
-
7.0
-
8 2.8 3.8 6.5 I8.2I
226 9 2418 - - - - 6.2

• - - - - - g
-
6.5
-
250 0 267 .4 273 1 3.4 4 2 6.6 66°° 6.4 7.8 (9.3 l
-
300 -
12 - 6.9°°
-
318.5 323.9 4.0 4.6 6.5 6 9 6.4 84 95
350 14 355.6 4.8 6.4
-
355.6 4.0 7.9 7.9 1.9 7.9 9.5 95
400 16 406 4 406 4 4.7 4.8 1.9 7.9 6.4 7.9 7.9 9.5 5
450 18 457.2 467.2 4.2 4.8 7.9 7.9 6.4 7.9 7.9 t. 9.5
508.0
-
I 500 '20 4.8 5.5 79 7.9 6.4 79 9.5 12.7 9.5
508 .0
-
550 '22 558 8 $58.8 - - 7.9 12.7 95
• I d.8 5.5 6.4 9.5
600 ;24 609.6 609.6l
-
5.5 6.4 - - 6.4 7.9 9.5 14.3
- .5
9
-
650 26 660.4 660 4 - - - . 7.9 79 12.7 -
-
9.5
700 28 711.2 71127 - - ea
- - 7.$ 79 12.1 15.9 9.5
..
750 30 762.0 762 0 64 79
'u a
- a
- 79 7.9 12.7 15.9 9s
800 32 812.8 8128 - - - - 79 79 12.7 15. 9
. 9$
850 34 863.6 863.6 - - - - 79 7.9 12.7 15.9 9.5
--
900 36 914.4 914.4 - - - - 7.9 7.9 12.7 15.9 9.5
950 38 965 2
-
96$.2 - - - - - 7
- - 9.5
~ 1000 40 1016 0 1016.0 . -I-'- -

- - 9
7
- - 9.5
- -
9
-
7
1050 42 066.8 1066.8 - - 9 -. - 9.5
N
I 1100 44 1117.6 11176 - - - - - 79 - 9.5
1150 46 1168.4 168.4 -

-
- - - 79 - - 9.5
- - - - 7.9 - - 9.5
-
-
1200 418 1219.2 12192
1250 50 1210.0 1270.0 - - - ·7 9
-
- - 9.5
1 300 52 1320.8 1320 8 ~- - - - • ·79 - - 9.s

1350 54 1371.6 37
• - 16 - - - - - ·79 - - 9.5
--
140
- ---
0
s6 1422 4 422.4
-
-
-
- - -
-
- 1.9 -- - 9.5
- -
-
-
1460 58 1473.2 1473.2 - ·7.9

·9 .s
1500 60 15240 1524.0 - - - - - ·7.9 - -
- ·9.5
Noe: ', ' TILJ' sand»rd
2, " Applied only small end side et the roe and nexfucnrs.
10 .
3. The numerical values it parenthesis are the samne thickness as Sch. 0 or Sch. 80
JS G3448 ANSI B36.10M
JM$ G3454 ANSI B36.19M
JS G3455
JI$ G3459
[in mm
I
Nor inut Wail Thickness Outside Norin t
Diarne Pipe
a Si e
$ 140 sch t
sch 40 $eh 00 x.5 $en 80 sch 100 $ch 120 xx$ A B
- - - - -
160
22 24 t 3.0 3.0 13.8 13.7 1/4
2.3 28 t 3.2 32 8 3/8
79
8 3.2
34
I 3.7
I 39
3.7
39
a
-
-- -
-
-
5.5
-
7.8
17..3
2 2
17.1
287 20 34
1
-
1
i 39 I 4.5 45 - - - 64 9.t 374.0 33.5 2
7
0 4.5
4.5 I
I 4d.9
5.l
4$
5.1 -
- =
- ---
6.4
7.1
9.7
10.2
127
48 6
d22
48.3
32
40
1 14
,
3 4.9 I 5.5 5.5 - - 8.7 11.1 60,5 60.3 50 2
6.0 I 7.0l 7.0 - - - 9.5 14.0 76 3 13.0 65 21/2
-
55 6.6 I 7.6 I 7.6 - - - 1I
. 15.27 89 1 88 9 80 3
~ 71 I 8.6l 86 - 11.1 - -
13.5 13.1 114
1·a3 - 00
66 8.1 I 9.5l 9s - 12.7 - 15.9 19.0 139.8 141.3 125 5
7.1 9.3 I11.0l 1.0
- 14.3
- 18.2 219 165.2 ·- 168.3 150
a
6
- - - - - - - - 190.7 - 175 7
8.2 10.3 112.l 12. 15.t 18.2 20.6 23.0 22.2 216.3 219.1 200 8
- - - - - - - - - 241.8 - 775 9
9.3 12.7 12.7 15. 18.3 21.4 25.4 28.6 25.4 267 4 273.1 250 o
25 .4
10.3
11.1 14.3
15.1 12.7
12.3
19.0
12.4 238
- ,-26.2
21.4 27.8
25.4 31.8
28.6 33.3
35.7 - -- 318.$
3$6.6 - 300 12
390 14
I
21.4 30.9 36.5

12. 16.7 12.) 366.6
40.5 - 406 4 406.4 40 16
-
23.8
--
29.4 39.7
14.3 19.0 12.7
34.9 4 5.2 - 4572 4s7.2 450 18
15 1
-
20.6
12.7
26.2
-286
32.5
-
3 8 1 44 4 50. 0
508.0 508.0 500
'20
'
-
17.5
22.2
24.6
12.7
12.7 31.0
349
38.9
41.3
46.0
476
52.4
54.0
59.5
--
-- - - 558.8
609.6
558.8
609.6
550
60
'22
'I 2- 4
- - 12.7 - - - - - - 660.4 640.4 0650 '26
- - 12.7 - - - - - - 711.2 711.2 700 28
- - 12.7 - - - - -- - 762.0 762.0 750 30

175
-- 12.1 - -- -- -- - 812.8 8128 800
-- 37 a
J
-
¢
17.5 2. - 861.6 963.6 860 34
19 1
-- 2.7 - - - - - - 914.4 914.4 900 36
. 127 - - - - - - 965.2 965.2 9 50
-1000- ·-40 - 378
- - - - - . -- - 1016.0 1016.0
-
-
12.7
- -- - - - - - 106& 8 1006.8 1050 42
-
121
- 12.7
-- - - - - 1117.6 1117.6 1100 44
- - 12.7 - - - - - 1168.4 1168.4
~ 150 46
·~
- - ~- -
%.e 4 A
- 12.7 - - -
- -
-
- ·12.7
- - - - 1219.2
1210.2
1200 48
---
- 1270.0 250 50
--- 12.
·12.T
7 - - - - - -1270.0 1320. 8
1371.6- 13716
1300 52
- - - - -- -
- -
1350 4
12.)
. - - - - - - 1422.4 1422 4 1400 66
- - - -- - - 1471.2 4732
.4 0
1a50
-
58
- - -60
e
·12.) - - - 1524.0 152 1500
ft
Straight and Reducing Tees
1 -
°° ' _
T +r •
l ID
MS SP-75
ANSI B16.9
• YTL'ssanrtard fin mm)
Outside Dur1e Curscte Damneter
Normina at evel
B
Ce mer 1a.£ net Narinal t
l Bwet
Pie Sir0
INPs1 D Fe Se 0
Hun OutterlT
(NP5I
Run Ou1le1 un Cu1et c M
1/2 w7 24 0
----~ ------
21.3 41,3
13.7 308 '4 26.7

17.1
28 4
.1/2
4
101.6
114.3
114.3
17.3
3
3/4 304 26.7 28 4
3 88.9 III3
27-1/2 73.0 108.0
w?2 21. 284 2 60.3 04 6
3/8 3
12. 28 4 112 48.3
R 1 334 1
33.4 38.1 38.1
6 6 168.3 168.3 142.7 142.7
3/4 26.7 38.1
5 41.3 136.7
1/2 213 318.1
4 114.3 130.0
11/4x 11/4 42.2 49 31/2 101.6 1270
1 33.4 47.8 3 889 124.0
3/4 26.7 47.8 2-1/2 73.0 120.6
/2 21.3 478 2 60.3
I. 4 48 8 8 219 1 1$ 1 8 177
122 1831 16
3 4 41.3 162
34 26.7 14 3 ...
21.3 572 1 2 16 1 24
22 60 g3 9
60 6 5 635
2
18 60.5 1 27 1 3 1
1 4
47 72 8 219 1
334 50 6 1681 1
3 1
26.7 44 4 41
12 71 1 7 1141
2127+212 73 0 730 762 16 2 9 ? +0
•
' 9
7 t 8 273
112 48 66 5 71 1
1 1 4 42 2 63 16831
3 .12 141 3
3 3 88 9 gr9 '94
2 2 7 0 82
2 60 16 2
2 18
1 14 422 69
DG.4 8
1( 10 6 2 355 6
88.9 919
7 0 889
GD 3 8: 6
A8 19 6 168
d x d 11 104d 04 6 18% 45'. 29
12 101 8
BE I 16
95.2 4
.
I84
25,4 0
741 3
.Et
2 8'
'99
2T 4
97
2570
2476
0. 8
04.8
299 1
282 4
31s.0
?6 )
142 9
102
'D.
320 5
2 8E 9 0 30
117 85 8 .9
1' 4'
1' E
Nate(1 Outlet dirnewon ''M" far run sizes 14 and largr is rsarnrented but not rum»tory.
14
Concentric and Eccentric Reducers
ou
1,
t
1 , 1D
l
+ i
I
D.
DD - d7 + - MS$ SP.75
ANS1 B16.9
TTL'sstandsrd fin mm
ut Bovot End1o. at Beel £met.to• at Bnwrt Fncd-to•

Fe 5¢
Large Sr1al E rad Pae Se Large Smut1 End Pipe Si
Large Small E nus
1PS INS INPS
£me
Enai Encl £rat
-End -
Enc
---
34 112 276.7 21.3 38.1 8 273.1 29.1 1778 34 32 863.6 812.8 609.6
38 17.3 6 168.3 30 762.0
1x3/4 5 41.3 26 711.2
w2
33.4 26.7 50.
14.3 24
21.3 8 4d 660 4
12 10 323.9 273.1 203 2 36 34
j
1-1/4 1 9144 863.6 609.6

314
42.2 33.4 50. a 219.1 32 812.8
26.7 8 6 68.3 30 762.0
1w2 21.3 C • .4 8 e a
11IL 1 e td I
48 3 ·2 2 61 rd 12 2. l 5 I 02 1,
4 5 10 273 318 6 965 2 9 44 60
3# 26.7
2 2
a 2719 34 863 6
6 168.3 2 8128
211'2 60.3 48 76.2 16?2.0
..
0
I d2.2 16» 14 ~ 406 .4 355.6 3556 28 7112
334 12 323.9 26 660.4
34 276.. 10 I 213 1 40» 8 101 0 9165 7 601 6
8 219 3 9144
2 18.3 18 16 Ts7.2 406 4 81.0 34 863.6
1% 394.5 6 2 812
I 33 4
12 323 30 762.0
217 BB 9 73.0 88 9 10 273 42 » 40 1066.2 1016.0 606) 6
20 18 !08.0 457.2 908 0 ,, B 965.27
12 483 .6 914.4
16 106 4d
- 14
12 I 355
J2396 34 86 .6
812.8
JI 2 016 88.9 101.6 32
22 20 558.8 508.0 508.0 30 762 0
212 r3.0
+
8 157 2
1I?7
2
1 t 4
60 3
48 3
t22
16
4
I 106.4
355.6
., 1016.0
609
18 9052
24 22 609.6 558.8 508.0 16 9 44
4 12 14.3 01.6 101.6
+
.3 20 508.0
88 9 46 42 1168 4 1117.6 71
'8 4572
s
2 2
2
r3 0
60 3 I 6 40•8 4 42
~
1066.8
10° ')
•1 ".' " 660.4 609 0g 6
£ b81.8
5 4 41.3 114.3 127.0 48 46 1219.2 168.4 711.2
3-1/2 01.6 70 508.0
8 457.2 44 1117.6
3 88.9 42 1066.8
2-112 73.0 28 26 711.2 660.4 609.6 d0 1016.0
I
6
d
2
s -
168.3
60.3
141.3
114.3
-
139.7
24
20
8
609.6
508.0
467.2
3-1/2 01.6 30 28 762.0 71.2 609.6

3 88.9 26 660.4
21/2 73.0 24 609.6
20 508.0
8 6 219.1 168.J 152.4
5 141,3 32 + 30 812.8 762.0 608 6
d 14.3 28 7I12
3-1/2 1016 26 660.4
88.9 24 609.6
73.0
17
2/·1
MSS SP.75
ANSI B16.9 4in mmnl
I
orn inal Out+icir Limiting arninal Outde
Diarmetur Lenrgmt Watt Thickness Lan0el3) Pipe Lengel 2
e,
Pio Diam«r
2) tor Length I $ire at Bevel E
Se at Bevl
£
48PSI 0 € INPSl 0
7 21 31 25.4 4.6 26 4 26 660.4 2766.7

id 26.7 75.4 3.8 25 4 28 1L,2 266.7
1 334 38 1 46 38 1 30 62.0 266.7
t4 422 38 1 d.8 38 1 32 812.8 266.7
-/2 48.3 38 1 51 38 1 34 863.6 266.7
2 60.3 38 1 56 44 A 36 914.4 266.7
21/2 )3.0 38 1 71 50.8 38 965.2 304.8
3 88.9 50.8H 7.6 63 5 40 1016.0 304.8
b I2 01.,6 63.6 81 76 2 42 1066.8 304.8
I 14. I L 5 86 b? 44 1117.6 342.9
5 141.3 76.2 9.7 88.9 46 1168.4 342.9
6 168.3 88.9 10.9 101.6 I 48 1219.2 342.9
8 219.1 101.6 12. 127.0
10 273.1 127.0 7
12.7 152.4
12 323.9 152.4 12.7 171.8
14 35
5.6 165.1 12.7 190.5
16 4064. 177.8 12.7 203.2
18 457.2 203.2 12.7 228.6
20 508.0 228.6 12.7 254.0
22 558.8 254.0 12.7 2754.0
24 609.6 266.7 12.7 304.8
Wall thicknesses tar Cays up t and including 36" ontorm 1a ANSI BH36 .10 Specifications, Cps 38" and larger contormn
to XS Spec ifications for wal thicknesses of 38" These are TTL Stardds as no Internationally Hecopn»red
Standards hawe teen et tor sch large sie wai l thickness
(t]The shape of thee p shall te ellipsoidal and shalt conform t@» th«e shape requirernen ts as given in the ASME Biler
ard
Pess ure Ve#el Code.
(2 Length E applies tor thickness not @xoocdg rhar giwen in coturnn "Limitirg Wail Thickness for Lengh E"
(3 Length E, applies tar thickness greater than that given in column "Limiting wan Thickness" tar NP5 24 anel matter For
NS
76 and larger, Length E, shall be by agreement tetwen mprfacrurer ard
puncher,
18
AN SI Dimensional Tolerances
ANS B16.,9, B16.28 din mm}

90 and 45
I
Ail Fittings
Returns
Toe ed uc0e Cans 180
EHws
Ours+de lnsi Center. Center+ Clrn•lli'•
Nominal Walt Owe«all 0voratl
l!J
Diameter Deavreter
Thickness
t.6net to.£road
Length
to-Cemtt to-Fc
at Bevel at End Length ot £nods
Dimension Dimension Dmnerion
Size Dirrension
00 Io T A, B c. M H € P 4 K U
I
15
1 07
or
1
. ·6.3
3 z 15 1. I)
4 I
5- 8 +2.2 4
·6.3
-1.5 Not 4es#
+4.0 than +6.3
10--18 ·3.0
-3.0 87-
of ·2.2 +2.2 +2.7 ·9.6 10.7
20--24 rarrinal
26-30 +6.3
-4.8 ·4.8
hackns
+3.0 +3.0 -
+4.8 +96
32-48 +4.8 +4.8
+9.5
50--50 +6,4 +9.5 +9.5 ·9.5 a
- -
-
+12.
62--70
-9.5
19.5 +12.7
- - -
+15.9
·72--80 --11.9
+119 ·15.9
z
Nomen Angularity Tolerance
Pipe poi oi
5ue
I lure
P
I "' 4 I I
t5[ P
5- 8 15 3.0
10--12 48
2.2
14-16 6.3
18-24 3.0
9.6
26-30
32-42 4.8 12.7
4d-48 190
"50--60 64
62--70 95 Off Plane
72-80 11.9
MS S Dimensional Tolerances
90" Elbows etucers

A F+tings 45 EIbcw Lap Jan1 180 Returns Cos
Te Stat Ends
Nnrat
Pae Ou1a4el1l
5ire Dartt Certer-to• Ower.all Center-to• Back·to• Alignment 0erall
a wait Erad Length Center Face et End Leagth
Wetching Tie kns fir@a ior
F, H Dimnersior Qimen-ion J
B. C, M 0 £
End A,
/2 +0.8 ±16 +1.6 ±6.4 ±6,4 +0.8 +3.0

-1I2
Nor less
2 thar
3-1/2 +0.8 87.1/2% 11.6 +1.6 :6.4 ·64 -0.8
of 13.0
d ±0.8 naminal ±1.6 +1.6 r6.4 -6,4 -0.8 +3.0
hick.ne
S•
8 +16
-0.8 +1.6 +1.6 +G.4 +6,4 +0.8 +6.4
2.3
10-8 -0.8 12.3 12.3 19.) 6.d +1.6 16.4
+3.0
20-24 0.8 +2.3 123 +9.7 +6.4 +1.6 ·8.4
din mmnl
Lap Joint
A l Fitting
51ut £ref
N ormina
Ppt
Outs!Tl r»a t?) Outside
Dumoter
Sure Wat Radius Damner
at
Th»ckr4 o! Lst of Lp
«fig
wet
End A G
I
0.8
i L +,
2
3 1/2
0.8
Not I
ha
~ +0
08
I (
$.8
872
4 8 0l +0J
r 'It l
'L I t Note5s.
(1)Cut of roundness is the vwtae sum ot
58 +16 thicknos +0 +0
-0.8 -1,6 -0.8 the plus and rimus
tolerance.
10--18 +2.3 40 +0
-0.8 -1.6 1.6
20--24 +3.0 +¢ 0
-0.8 1.6 -1.,6
21
.
t-
•"" A
t
«
.,. .-ii 4
«$
.
I
'$
+4
•
+,
,.
~
Head office: th Floor wS Tower, 395/5 5itom Road, Bangrak

Bangkok 10500, Thailand
Factory: 33/3 GP 7, Soi Pon-Chareon KM. 16.5 Bangna Trad Road
Bangplee, Samutprakarn 10540, Thailand
Phone: (662)-237-7225-40, (662-234-7193-95
Fax: (662)-237-7241, 46621-2366627
E-mail: isa@ws-inti.com, chrisl@ws-inti.com,kattyws-inti.com
Qatar Factory
Flange Fittings
QATAR FACTORY
CERTIFIED TO 1$0
9001:2015
20005173 0M15
@]aaroraostwe
ETEIIIIII.III
1$0 14001.2004 No,01744/1
BS OHSA$ 18001.2007 N0.00751/1
1$0 T$ 2900 1.2010 No.00016/1
www.gatarfactory.ga
e
BUTT-WELDED
Fittings & Flanges
Shieldg lobal .com

Introduction
SHIELD is a company created to cater to the infrastructure, fire
@
protection and building services industries with a comprehensive
quality. <@
APPROVED
LISTED
development.

in the industry in Europe, Asia and America in terms of quality and
delivery lead time. Our fully experienced and professional staff is
there to provide engineering expertise and after sales service
exactly when
you need it.

network of distribution centres around the world, you will find that
customer satisfaction is what we excel at.
We are justifiably proud of our global client base. With offices and
facilities in the UK and Middle East, we are able to comprehend
the specific needs of your particular region .
C€
. .... .
"'
Contents
PRODUCT PAGE
Butt-Welded Fittings 1
Wall Thickness 2
Elbows 3-5

90° Elbow Short Radius - SD-BSRE 90 5
Equal & Cross Tees 6
Equal Tee - SD-BET 6

Cross Tee - SD-BCT 6
Reducers 7 - 14
Reducer Tee - SD-BRT 7

Reducer Cross - SD-BRC 7
Concentric Reducer - SD-BCOR 10
Eccentric Reducer - SD-BECR 10
Reducing Elbow - SD-BRE 90 13
Bends 15 - 16
180° Bend Long Radius - SD-BLRB 180 15

180° Bend Short Radius - SD-BSRB 180 16
End Cap 17
End Cap - SD-BCP 17
Flanges 18- 26
Flanges 18
Blind Flange - SD-BF 150- Class 150 18
Blind Flange - SD-BF 300 - Class 300 19
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF 150- Class 150 20
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF 300 - Class 300 21
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF 150- Class 150 22
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF 300 - Class 300 23
Blind Flange - SD-BF-PN 10, 16 & 25 24
Slip-on Flange - SD-SOF-RF - PN 10, 16 & 25 25
Welded Flange - SD-WF-RF - PN 10, 16 & 25 26
Shield I I OD I
Blind
I
I I
I I I
I I K
//4l¥
I
Range ~
G
I
]l
D
I
I lodel : SD-BF 30 I
Material:
EHEBENEREEESREENE ASTM A105, Carbon Steel
IEEE IEEE Standard:

ASME B16.5, Class 300
½ 95 12.7 34.9 4 66.7 % ½
¾ 115 14.3 42.9 4 82.6 ¾ %
1 125 15.9 50.8 4 88.9 ¾ %
1-¼ 135 17.5 63.5 4 98.4 ¾ %
1-½ 155 19.1 73.0 4 114.3 % ¾
2 165 20.7 92.1 8 127.0 ¾ %
2-½ 190 23.9 104.8 8 149.2 % ¾
3 210 27.0 127.0 8 168.3 % ¾
3-½ 230 28.6 139.7 8 184.2 % ¾
4 255 30.2 157.2 8 200.0 % ¾
5 280 33.4 185.7 8 235.0 % ¾
6 320 35.0 215.9 12 269.9 % ¾
8 380 39.7 269.9 12 330.2 1 %
10 445 46.1 323.8 16 387.4 1-% 1
12 520 49.3 381.0 16 450.8 1-¼ 1-%
14 585 52.4 412.8 20 514.4 1-¼ 1-%
16 650 55.6 469.9 20 571.5 1-¾ 1-¼
18 710 58.8 533.4 24 628.6 1-¾ 1-¼
20 775 62.0 584.2 24 685.8 1-¾ 1-¼
24 915 68.3 692.2 24 812.8 1-% 1-½
Shield
I
l~------~I I
X
I I B I I
Flange
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G
K
N'
I
I
I
I
~------------ ~I
I
I
I
1
OD
'
W
IT , I
'
I
[ Model_: Su-gpF-F 30
Material: ASTM A 105, Carbon Steel
Dimension: ASME B16.5, Class 300
EE EE FESEREREESE EE ERRSE EE
IEEERTEE IEEE
½ 95 12.7 34.9 38 22.2 21 4 66.7 % ½
¾ 115 14.3 42.9 48 27.7 24 4 82.6 ¾ %
125 15.9 50.8 54 34.5 25 4 88.9 ¾ %
1-%% 135 17.5 63.5 64 43.2 25 4 98.4 ¾ %
1-% 155 19.1 73.0 70 49.5 29 4 114.3 % ¾
2 165 20.7 92.1 84 61.9 32 8 127.0 ¾ %
2-% 190 23.9 104.8 100 74.6 37 8 149.2 % ¾
3 210 27.0 127.0 117 90.7 41 8 168.3 % ¾
3-% 230 28.6 139.7 133 103.4 43 8 184.2 % ¾
4 255 30.2 157.2 146 116.1 46 8 200.0 % ¾
5 280 33.4 185.7 178 143.8 49 8 235.0 % ¾
6 320 35.0 215.9 206 170.7 51 12 269.9 % ¾
8 380 39.7 269.9 260 221.5 60 12 330.2 f %
10 445 46.1 323.8 321 276.2 65 16 387.4 1-%
12 520 49.3 381.0 375 327.0 7 16 450.8 1-%% 1-%
14 585 52.4 412.8 425 359.2 75 20 514.4 1-%% 1-%
16 650 55.6 469.9 483 410.5 81 20 571.5 1-% 1-%%
18 710 58.8 533.4 533 461.8 87 24 628.6 1-% 1-%%
20 775 62.0 584.2 587 513.1 94 24 685.8 1-% 1-%%
24 915 68.3 692.2 702 616.0 105 24 812.8 1-% 1-%
Shield range of Buttwelded Fittings & Flanges please contact
your nearest office.
United Kingdom
Redburn House, 2A Tonbridge Road,
Romford, Essex, RM3 8QE, United
Kingdom.
Email: Shielduk@shieldglobal.com
Tel : +44 1708 377731
Fax: +44 1708 347637
A
A ,--
•
o
SHIELD
O
LL
LL
www.shieldglobal.com co
0
0
METALFAR
PRODOTTI INDUSTRIALI S.P.A.
Slip-on Flanges
I METALFAR PRODOTTI INDUSTRIALI S.P.A.
600 lb/sq. in.

-t ff]( --[
Slip-on Flanges }w ]( « [
t 0,25" = 6,4 mm
g0
•--------k0---------•
•---------D0--------
~
ASME B16.5
Raised
Pipe Flange Hub Drilling Template
Approx.
Face Weight
Norn.
Size
OD
in.
mm mm
D
in.
mm
J
in.
b
in.
mm
h
in.
mm
m
in.
mm
g
In.
mm
Num-
ber
I
in.
mm
k
in.
mm
•
Pounds
Kilo
0,84 3,75 0,88 0,56 0,88
1,50 1,38 4 0,62 2,62 1,6
"
·/,"°
21,3
1,05
95,3
4,62
22,4
1,09
14,2
0,62
22,4
38,1
1,00
1,88
35,1
1,69 4
15,7
0,75
66,5
3,25
0,74
2,8
26,7 117,3 27,7 15,7 25,4
47,7 42,9 19,1 82,6 1,27
1 1,315 4,88 1,36 0,69 1,06
2,12 2,00 4 0,75 3,50 3,3
33,4 124,0 34,5 17,5 26,9
53,8 50,8 19,1 88,9 1,52
11/"° 1,66 5,25 1,70 0,81 1,12
2,50 2,50 4 0,75 3,88 4,5
42,2 133,4 43,2 20,6 28,4
63,5 63,5 19,1 98,6 2,03
11/"° 1,90 6,12 1,95 0,88 1,25
2,75 2,88 4 0,88 4,50 6,5
48,3 155,4 49,5 22,4 31,8
69,9 73,2 22,4 114,3 2,96
2" 2,375 6,50 2,44 1,00 1,44
3,31 3,62 8 0,75 5,00 8,0
60,3 165,1 62,0 25,4 84,1
36,6 91,9 19,1 127,0 3,62
21/" 2,875 7,50 2,94 1,12 1,62
3,94 4,12 8 0,88 5,88 11,6
73,0 190,5 74,7 28,4 41,1
100,1 104,6 22,4 149,4 5,28
3" 3,50 8,25 3,57 1,25 1,81
4,62 5,00 8 0,88 6,62 15,4
88,9 209,6 90,7 31,8 46,0
117,3 127,0 22,4 168,1 7,00
3'/" 4,00 9,00 4,07 1,38 1,94
5,25 5,50 8 1,00 7,25 19,5
101,6 228,6 103,4 35,1 49,3
133,4 139,7 25,4 184,2 8,84
4" 4,50 10,75 4,57 1,50 2,12
6,00 6,19 8 1,00 8,50 31,9
114,3 273,1 116,1 38,1 53,8
152,4 157,2 25,4 215,9 14,5
5" 5,563 13,00 5,66 1,75 2,38
7,44 7,31 8 1,12 10,50 53,7
141,3 330,2 143,8 44,5 60,5
189,0 185,7 28,4 266,7 24,4
6" 6,625 14,00 6,72 1,88 2,62
8,75 8,50 12 1,12 11,50 63,2
168,3 355,6 170,7 47,8 66,5
222,3 215,9 28,4 292,1 28,7
8" 8,625 16,50 8,72 2,19 3,00
10,75 10,62 12 1,25 13,75 95,6
219,1 419,1 221,5 55,6 76,2
273,1 269,7 31,8 349,3 43,4
10° 10,75 20,00 10,88 2,50 3,38
13,50 12,75 16 1,38 17,00 155
273 508,0 276,4 63,5 85,9
342,9 323,9 35,1 431,8 70,3
12" 12,75 22,00 12,88 2,62 3,62
15,75 15,00 20 1,38 19,25 186
323,8 558,8 327,2 66,5 91,9
400,1 381,0 35,1 489,0 84,2
14" 14,0 23,75 14,14 2,75 3,69
17,00 16,25 20 1,50 20,75 217
355,6 603,3 359,2 69,9 93,7
431,8 412,8 38,1 527,1 98,7
16" 16,0 27,00 16,16 3,00 4,19
19,50 18,50 20 1,62 23,75 313
406,4 685,8 410,5 76,2 106,4
495,3 469,9 41,1 603,3
142
18" 18,0 29,25 18,18 3,25 4,62 21,50 21,00 20 1,75 25,75 381
457,2 743,0 461,8 82,6 117,3 546,1 533,4 44,5 654,1 173
20" 20,0 32,00 20,20 3,50 5,00 24,00 23,00 24 1,75 28,50 485
508 812,8 513,1 88,9 127,0 609,6 584,2 44,5 723,9 220
24" 24,0 37,00 24,25 4,00 5,50 28,25 27,25 24 2,00 33,00 687
609,6 939,8 616,0 101,6 139,7 717,6 692,2 50,8 838,2
312
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12.5 FM200 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

MANUAL
67
Fike SECTION 3/ SERVICE
FIKE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
HFC-125 AGENT
UL/ULC
LISTINGS FM
APPROVAL
NFPA 2001 STANDARD

HFC-227ea Equipment, Design & Service Manual
Manual Part Number: 06-433 (Rev. 8 / February, 2017)
Page:76
An Enclosure Integrity Test shall be perfo rm ed on all pro tected enclosures.
A Door Fan Test is the accepted m ethod to estim ate worst-case ro om leakage and agent
Enclosure (co ncentration) hold tim e. The door fa n calculation m ethod m akes it possible to predict the tim eline
Integrity fo r a descending interfa ce to fa ll to a given height and estim ate how long an
extinguishing co ncentration will be m aintained within the pro tected space.
Refer to NFPA Standard 2001, latest edition for additional information and door fan test procedures.
Auxiliary Operation of auxiliary functions such as door closures, damper closures, air handling shutdown,
etc. Functions should be verified when the control system is activated, both manually and automatically.
Caution/
Check to ensure that all signs are legible and free of damage.
Advisory Signs
Maintenance
Certain aspects about the hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall system performance.
Interval Factor Recommendation
The items described in System Checkout need to be re-checked during system maintenance. If hazard
conditions indicate the inability to maintain agent concentration, a Door Fan Test needs to be
performed:
1 Year The volume of the hazard enclosure(s) must be checked to determine if agent being
Check Hazard supplied will protect the hazard properly.
Enclosure
If changes are found, the system needs to be recalculated.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
IMPORTANT NOTE: Before starting system checkout or system maintenance, disable the system control
panel releasing circuit.
AGENT STORAGE CONTAINER &

ACCESSORIES System Checkout
Factors to Consider Recommendation
The items described in System Installation, covered in the Equipment Information Section, need to be re-checked
during system checkout.
Pressure should read 360 psig at 70F (24.8 bar at 21 °C). For temperatures other than 70F (21C),
Container Pressure reference Temperature vs. Pressure Chart on the Pressure Gauge Component Sheet in the
Equipment Section of this manual.
Amount of agent in the Container(s) must be verified by either weighing the container or by using a
Agent Weight Liquid Level lndictor (LLi). This information should be recorded and affixed to the container so
it can be used during container maintenance.
If used, check to ensure device is installed properly to container and wired properly to
Low Pressure Switch
control panel.

Page:78
Im pulse Check to ensure the IVO circuit is free of tro uble and ground fa ult co nditions befo re installing the
Valve
IVO to the co ntainer.
Operator (IVO)
Maintenance
IMPORTANT NOTE: These procedures do not preclude those required by NFPA 2001 and the authority
having jurisdiction (AHJ).
The nominal pressure should be 360 psig at 70F (24.8 bar @ 21 °C); however, the
pressure will vary with temperature. In the range of S0°F to 80°F (l0°C to 27°C) the
difference is approximately 2 psig (15 kPa) per degree. For temperatures other
than
Check Container 70°F (21 °C), reference Temperature vs. Pressure Chart on the Pressure Gauge
3 Months
Pressure Component Sheet in the Equipment Section of this manual.
If the pressure loss indicated exceeds 10% of the nominal pressure, check
the container for leaks and repair as necessary.
Verify the weight of the agent in each container matches the agent weight
stamped on the label. If the weight indicates a shortage exceeding five percent of
6 Months required
Verify Agent weight, the container must be removed from service for repair and/or recharge.
Weight
If the container has a liquid level indicator installed, weight verification can be made
without the need for cylinder removal.
Containers shall not be recharged without a retest if more than five years have
elapsed since the last test. The retest consists of a complete external and internal
visual inspection in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49,
Section
173.34(e)(10). The CFR requirements also refer to the Compressed Gas Association
(CGA) Pamphlet C-6, Section 3.
Container
5 Years Cylinders continuously in service without discharging shall receive a complete
Inspection
external [visual] inspection every five years. The cylinder does not need to be
emptied for this inspection.
All visual inspections must be performed according to the regulations of CFR Title
49 and CGA Pamphlet C-6, Section 3. All inspections are to be done by CGA / DOT
approved inspectors only. Reference: NFPA No. 2001.
PIPE NETWORK
System Checkout
Check to ensure Piping is installed according to the system design drawings. If not, system
needs to be recalculated.
Discharge Piping
Checked piping to see that it is securely supported and free from any lateral movement. All
joints should be checked for mechanical tightness. Discharge piping shall be pressure tested in
accordance with NFPA 2001, latest edition.
H Part Number: 06-433 (Rev. 8 / February, 2017)
F Page:79
C
-
2
2
7
e
a
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
,
D
e
s
i
g
n
&
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
M
a
n
u
a
l
M
a
n
u
a
l
Discharge Pressure
Switch Check to ensure the Discharge Pressure Switch is installed and wired co rrectly.
Check Valves If used, check to ensure the "Flow Arrow" is pointing in the co rrect direction.
Maintenance
Condition of Pipe Check the system discharge piping for corrosion and damage.
6 Months
Check all piping supports to make sure they are tight and all piping is securely
Pipe Supports
supported.
Fike recommends changing the damper in 3" check valves after each discharge. This
After System only applies to the 3" check valves that opened.
3" Check Valve
Discharge
Refer to replacement procedure on page 5.
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
System Checkout

Verify that the correct nozzle part number is installed at the proper location in accordance with
the system plans. If the piping system was changed from the original system plans, make sure the
Nozzle Part Number
nozzles were calculated using the "as installed" piping configuration.
vs Location
Check to ensure the nozzle(s) is aimed/ positioned correctly.
Set Screws Make sure all nozzle set screws are in place.
Nozzle Orifices Check to see that nozzle orifices are clear and unobstructed.
Maintenance
The items described in System Checkout need to be re-checked during system maintenance.
Corrosion Verify that the orifices are not showing signs of corrosion.
6 Months
Check all nozzle orifices for obstructions and make sure large objects have not
Obstructions been placed in front of the nozzles that would block the discharge.

Page:80
D ETEC TIO N AN D CO NTR O L
SYSTEM
The information contained in this document does not cover service and maintenance procedures for the Detection and
Control System (electrical portion). The electrical portion of the system must be thoroughly checked out according to the
manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of the AHJ.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Do not arm the Fike Clean Agent Fire Suppression system before the Detection and Control
System has been checked out and all circuits are free of trouble and ground fault conditions.
If control panel checks out, install the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) to the container(s).
3" CHECK VALVE DAMPER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT NOTES: Before starting this procedure, disable the system control panel releasing
circuit.
This only applies to the 3" check valves that have opened due to agent
pressure. Dampers DO NOT need to be replaced in 1" and 2" check valves.
Step 1: To replace the damper, remove the cap on the 3" check
valve. Step 2: Remove old damper.
Step 3: Insert new damper (P/N 70-322) and screw check valve cap (wrench tight) on the 3" check
valve.
3" Check Valve Cap Damper (P/N 70-322)
l,
«-kl
--j'
-i. L
3" Check Valve (P/N 70-317)
NOTE: After procedure is completed on all 3" check valves involved, system can be
rearmed.
Page:81
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
12. 6 SHOP DRAWING
68
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -;-1
-
FM200 SYSTEM LEGENDS &
SYMBOLS DISCHARGE NOZZLE, 360' &, 180' /

e ABORT SWITCHFI200
HFC 227e0 an] IM PULSE RELEASING
o8 CYLINDER JUNCTION/NODE o VODULE IMPULSE VALVE
FI2DO PPE W/ PIPE SLEE [es]
==p
NU/BER OPERATOR
PIPE SUPPORT / HANGERS cl DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH
I FECP I EXTINGUISHING CONTROL PANEL t5 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
y y
# f •
® SV0KE DETECTOR teal. END-0F-LINE RESISTOR
Lr NNUAL RELEASE STATION c WARNING/CAUTION SIGN
T.X RM. 4000

PROPOSED RCC CYLINDER ENCLOSURE
ROOM (SCOPE BY OTHERS)
CYLINDER ENCLOSURE TO BE MAINTAIN
PROPER VENTILATION & THE
TEMPERATURE WITHIN MANUFACTURER
T.X RM. T.X RM. 4000
- L
4000
1No 150LBS (61L) UPRIGHT CYLINDER [[] RENOTE INDICATOR lLL-
ILLUMINATED SIGN (INSIDE)
4510mm6 10mm HEIGHT FILLED WTH
50.00Kg FM200 GAS CYLINDER or HORN MW/STROBE LIGHT (/P) lL4
ILLUMINATED SIGN (OUTSIDE)
2 2
HORN W/STROBE LIGHT 1----1 CABLE 2C X 2.5mm IN 25mm CONDUIT
w AU\RM BELL I- - -, CABLE 2C X 1.5mm' IN 25mm CONDUIT
ABBREVIATIO
N
N NOZZLE FECP FIRE EXTNGUISHING CONTROL PANEL
E ENCLOSURE D DETECTOR
z ZONE R R0OM VOID
032 RAISE OF 3.25M NTS NOT TO SCALE TRENCH
GENERAL NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. SYSTEM & LEGENDS USED ARE AS PER NEPA-170.
3. HFC227eo CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH QCDD, NFPA-2001 & NFPA-72.
4. HFC227ea CLEAN AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM DESIGN CONCENTRATION SHAILL BE
ATTAINED WITHIN IO SECONDS AND AGENT TO BE VAINTAINED FOR MINIMUM 10
MINUTES HOLD TIME.
5. THE ENCLOSURES/ROOIS PROTECTED BY HFC227ea CLEAN AGENT SY'STEM SHALL BE
PROVID ED WITH WARNING/CAUTION SIGN B0ARD.
6. THE ENCLOSURES/ROOMS PROTECTED BY HFC227ea CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM SHALL BE AIR TIGHT.
7. SUPPLY & RETURN AIR PATHS INCLUDING OTHER PERMANENT OR TEMPORARY OPENINGS
SHAILL BE AUTOMATICALLY CLOSED DURING PRE-DISCHARGE STAGE.
8. FM200 CYUNDER & CONTROL PANEL OUTDOOR INSTALLATION (DIRECT TO
PIPE SUPPORT HANGER
SUNLIGHT} IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
(P)
MATERIALS NOTES:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, ALL VA/OR COMPONENTS OF HFC227eo SY'STEM USED
SALL BE UL LISTED OR FM APPROVED AND QCDD APPROVED.
2. PIPES AND FITTINGS AS PER ACCEPTED/APPROVED TECHNICAL MATERIAL SUBMITTAL
3. ALL WIRING SHALL BE OF FIRE RESISTANCE RATED CABLE AS
8 FM200 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FOR MV ROOM

FOLLOWS: A. 2 CORE X 1.5 sq.mm FOR INITIATING DEVICES
(),FM2O0 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR MV (FM200 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FOR MV ROOM B. 2 CORE x 2.5 sq.mm FOR POWER SUPPLY AND NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES.
ROOM SCALE (ROOM VOID) 1:50 saus (TRENCH VOID) 15# 4. INCOMING POWER SUPPLY TO THE CONTROL PANELS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WIT H UN-SWITCHED SPUR UNIT 15 AMPS, 240VAC INCLUDING
EARTHING.
FM200 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF

OPERATION I. AUTOMATIC OPERATION:
I. ACTIVATION OF ANY ONE OF THE DETECTOR IN EITHER CIRCUIT WITHIN THE AFFECTED AREA SHALL (AURW STAIE);
1. ILLUMINATE THE 'ALARM' INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY CUSTOM LED FOR PROPER ZONE INDICATOR.
2. ACTIVATE ALARM BELL INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA.
3. SEND 'ALARM' SIGNAL TO MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
I. SUBSEQUENT OPERATION OF A 'CROSS-ZONED' DETECTOR WTHIN THE AFFECTED AREA SALL (PRE-DISCHARGE STAIE);
1. ILLUMINATE 'PRE-DISCHARGE' INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY CUSTOW LED FOR PROPER ZONE INDICATOR.
2. ACTIVATE THE AUDIO & VISUAL ALARM INDICATOR (STROBE/HORN} INSIDE & OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA.
3. ACTUATE CIRCUIT TO ENERGIZE 0-30 SECOND ADJUSTABLE TIME DELAY 'EVACUATION TIE.
4. ENABLE SYSTEM ABORT SEQUENCE.
5. ILLUMINATE 'EVACUATE NOM GAS DISCHARGE' WARNING SIGN INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA
4.3K0
6. TRANSFER RELAYS TO CLOSE ASSOCIATED FIRE DAMPER, OR SHUT DOWN HVAC
4.3K0 SYSTEM. Ill. AFTER PRE-SET TIME DELAY SEQUENCE, THE FOLLOWING SHALL OCCUR
20K0
(RELEAS E STATE};
20K0 EOL Re 1. ACTUATE CIRCUIT TO RELEASE FV200 AGENT INTO THE AFFECTED AREA.
r
2. ILLUMINATE THE "RELEASE" INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY CUSTOM LED FOR DISCHARGE INDICATION.
-m' -o' +
20K 3. AUDIO & VISUAL ALARM INDICATOR (STROBE/HORN} INSIDE & OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA REMAINS ACTIVE.
z
4. ILLUMINATE WARNING SIGN 'DON'T ENTER GAS DISCHARGED' OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA ACIVATED BY DISCHARGE PRESSURE SMITCH.
c ? ? 5. "SUPERVISORY" SIGNAL (GAS DISCHARGED} TO MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VIA EXTINGUISHING CONTROL PANEL RELAYS.
O 5
#a
l z
o
c II. ELECTRICAL MANUAL OPERATION: (MANUAL RELEASE STATION)
o
c
LE
o
0- a 1. ACTIVATION OF MANUAL RELEASE STATION SHALL DUPLICATE THE "CROSS-ZONED DETECTION" SEQUENCE
:::::,e
co 2 DESCRIBED ABOVE EXCEPT TIME DELAY AND ABORT FUNCTION.
LE Lu
t
2
:::::,e
q
r
t
o 3. TRANSFER RELAYS TO CLOSE ASSOCIATED FIRE DAMPER, OR SHUT DOWN HVAC SYSTEM.
2 1 No 150LBS (61L) UPRIGHT 4. ACTUATE CIRCUIT TO RELEASE FV200 ACENT INTO THE AFFECTED AREA.
-c Lu
o' CYLINDER
z L «a.LJ 0510mm610mm HEIGHT FILLED
5. ILLUMINATE THE "RELEASE" INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY CUSTOM LED FOR DISCHARGE INDICATION.
c
Lu
WITH 6. ACTIVATE THE AUDIO & VSUAL ALARM INDICATOR (STROBE/HORN} INSIDE & OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA.
'% 0
Lu 50.00Kg FI200 GAS 7. ILLUMINATE WARNING SIGNS INSIDE AND OUTSIDE PROTECTED AREA.
0- Oat0 a Q
.,~
cc CYLINDER
"e z7° 8. "SUPERVISORY" SIGNAL (GAS DISCHARGED} TO MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VIA EXTINGUISHING CONTROL PANEL
tu E
< L
1 2 3J 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1J P 4 RELAYS. Ill. MECHANICAL MANUAL OPERATION: (MECHANICAL PUSH BUTTON)
~N 100mm CONCRETE
POIIR 1.1111D
- ~ PLINTH (SCOPE BY 1. SYSTEM CAN BE ACTIVATED MECHANICALLY BY DEPRESSING THE RED STRIKE BUTTON OF THE IVO LOCATED ON CYLINDER HEAD
OTHERS}
0-
DIAGNOSTICS 0 0 EXCEPT TIME DELAY AND ABORT FUNCTION.
s
8
5
4
RELAY
BASE HEAD WITH
2. DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATED AND SEND 'ALARM' SIGNAL TO VAIN FIRE AUARM CONTROL PANEL THROUGH EXTINGUISHING
S+
6
-
€
F (Local ONTROL PANEL RELAYS.
~ ~ Device}
I0 FIRE ALAR M SICl MM £ 0
P5
_ISOMETRIC LAYOUT C
CON/ON FAULT / TROUBLE QC NORVAL
2 -$ + SCALE NTS
- © to 1.20 £0 +I 3. TRANSFER RELAYS TO CLOSE ASSOCIATED FIRE DAMPER, OR SHUT DOWN HVAC SYSTEM.
4. ACTIVATE THE AUDIO/VISUAL AUARM INDICATOR (STROBE/HORN} IN & OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA.
. J
-
TO FIRE AUARM SLC 0
6
i
}l
2 + © 2.0A WAXMUM It~aai
- -.f
I r P6 6. 'SUPERVISORY SIGNAL (GAS DISCHARGED) TO WAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VA EXTINGUISHING CONTROL PANEL RELAYS.
@AURW
~r
(By Fire Alarm System 2 EBLE
~ IN OUT IV. ABORT OPERATION:
0 QPREDSCHARG
w
E
0
b >IF ABORT SWITCH IS ACTIVATED WITHIN PRE-DISCHARGE PERIOD, THE FOLLOWING SHALL OCCUR;
Contractor)
O €RIESE 6
e
LOW PRESSURE SUPERVISION
MM
(By Fire Norm System
Contractor)
SUPERMISORY HORN/STROBE
Yo, wplN 'o' 1.2k0 EOL
J
I N IN~ ~
o 16.05.2019
DISABLE 43yr'py1/ll le2(4 MAX1/[ pp " 1. ILLUMINATE "ABORT" INDICATOR ON THE CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY CUSTOM LED FOR PROPER ZONE ISSUED FOR APPROVAL JAF
2 0 INDICATION.
• d==sffl.
( RELEASE DISABLED RESET 2. RELEASING OF GAS IS HELD IF ABORT SWITCH IS PRESSED CONTINUOUSLY. PPS ARM
0
TO FIRE AURM SIC/ MM

o ·5l. 6
El p7
$
(By Fire Alarm System

IROUBLE
~
Contractor} P2
o f6
GAS
DISCHARGE e PANEL SILENCED $•
8• n
-
SllfNCE
~
6 A80RT
6 6
:r 6
SHUTDOWN FAULT
TO ACU 0 •
u
0
GROUND PU.SE REL.E NG VOUE s_
~
• 2.4K0 EOL M
=k'
s,7£0Jee
CONFIG.
SWITCHES
SEVEN
SERVICE
HUB @ ]_ ,1
ABA
SALEEL
:f
T0 DAIPER 2.04 MAXIMU
if
DESIGN DATA TABULATION
ACTUATOR
3
~ S
=;
)I
)
g!! ~
~ IMPULSE
VALE SN DESIGN PARAIETIERS ENCLOSURE INFORMATION
CLIENT:
@ . 90 9
OPERATOR
NON POWER LIMITED J (AT FM200
1.20
1 DESIGN STANDARD NFPA-2001 TYPE OF ENCLOSURE R00l VOID TRENCH
i
I 1 2 + 4- I CYLINDER) VOID
TO MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER
6
4.3K0 CLEAN AGENT FV200 4.00 m 0.00 m
. 2 EXTINGUISHING AGENT WIDTH
le Ii<,- 0
S e9
ECONO MI C ZON ES
0 3 DESIGN CONCENTRATION 7.00% LENGTH 5.40 m 0.00 m
(IF EQUIPPED) r18[

$l3 Pl[ekouoe ROOM VOID COM PANY, QAT AR
4.3K0 1.20 4 FLOODING FACTOR 0.5483 kg/m' AREA 21.06 n' 6.89
1
TO FIRE AILARM SLC~~--l lei: 2C x 2.5mm FIRE RATED
CABLE 2QKQ
£0I I%. m?
CONSULTANT:
E
TRENCH VOID
r
$7GE-2 (PR£DSCRG?) IMM S], Re
5 21 3.65 m 1.2
oiblate]bl r [ DESIGN TEMP. ¢ HEIGHT
(By Fire Alarm System Contractor) i]s y'
2QKQ 1.2k0 m
•
e
VAX EXPECTED 27 C VOLUME 78.84 m' 8.27 m'
TEMP. (RECOWENDED)
TO BE VERIFIED FROM FIRE AUARM
SEQUENCE C..EL...J r' T +
7
-
AVE. CYL. PRESSURE 25 BAR 0 21' C NON PERMEABLE VOLUME -
UNITED CONSULTANTS@~ o!,l..tu...:1J ~bJ:1!
..t
BATTERY#1 BATTERY/2 8 TYPE OF FIRE HAZARD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TOTAL VOLUNE 78.84 m' ARCHITECTURAL,STRUCTURAL, ELECTRICAL, el]. el -eail
MECHANICAL AND NTENOR DESIGN CONSULTANTS lb Lw .h6vS
8.27 m' iirar,int/r/.as .A.114+%
Dela, Qr.Te4ST234.fa4.1
12VDC
TO IRE AURM 67arr 12VDC
gsl Zl i -~·-·-·-·-·-· 9 TYPE OF APPLICATION TOTAL FLOODING CALCULATED RESULTS
Web site: www.uc-qatar.com E-Mail: uc@consultant.com
SICluw 2C 1.5mm' : . I 2C x 2.5mm' 10 AX. DISCHARGE TIWE 10.0 sec WIN. AGENT REQUIRED 43.19 Kg
STAGE-1 (ALAR M) MEP CONTRACTOR :
4.54 Kg
f]Rf RA[FT) (ALE ,' FIRE RATED ! !!!! l
TOTAL AGENT P ROVIDED 50.00 Kg
FECP CABLE
AC N[[J[RA["
(SHP PRO PANEL) TOTAL DISCHARGE TIME 7.4 sec. AL MUNTASSER
A(' [lllb
CHASSIS GROUND >, CHASSIS GROUND (EARTH}
CONNECTION SHALL BE ADE
CYLINDER CAPACITY 150LBS (61l) UPRIGHT CONTRACTING & TRADING
CYLINDER PROTECTED AREA W ROOM 0 ABA SALEEL
•
TOTAL CYLINDER QTY. 1 CYLINDER
DIRECTLY TO STANDOFF IN
ENCLOSURE.
CO.
TO PRE AUARN SYSTEM (COMMON FAULT/TROUBLE)
TO FIRE AURN SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SUPERVISION)
( FM200 FECP SHP-PRO CONTROLLER TERMINAL
DIAGRAM
SCALE NTS TO FIRE AUARM SYSTEM (GAS RELEASED) - _
?]
IMPORTANT NOTE : TO ACHIEVE THE 7.00% MINIMUM DESIGN CONCENTRATION, ALL AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEMS, HVAC AND ENERGIZED FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR:
#10 GREEN
EARTH GRND.
ELECTRICAL
QATAR FACTORY
POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENTS MUST BE SHUTDOWN; AND THE ROOM MUST BE TOTALLY SEALE D, FREE FROM ANY LEAKS AND ALL ASSOVIATED LEAKS New Industrial Area, Zone. 81, Street. 23, Building.195
TAPPED AHEAD OF AND ALL ASSOCIATED DIPERS MUST BE CL0SED.
BREAKER
(BY ELECTRICAL
SECTION}
TO ACU SHUTDOWN -·l ~»H
NOZZLE SCHEDULE P.O.Box 55644, Doha, Qatar.
I0 DWPER ACTUATOR
[l FUSED CUT-
OUT
Tel: (974) 4402 - 5888, Fax: (974) 4411-4630
TO VAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER (F EQUIPPED) -·I - [ LOCKABLE BREAKER SLNO. NOZZLE VOID TYPE DIETER DRILL SIZE NOZZLE AREA PART THIS DRAMNG IS THE PROPERTY OF QATAR FACTORY. IT SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED,
TO FIRE ALARM STAGE-2 (PRE DISCHARG E) -?

W/ BOX PAINTED NUMBER QATAR FACTORY
fCor gong +a pt 4 Sal y N
COPIED, LENT, OR OTH ERWISE DISPOSED OF DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTL Y, NOR USED FOR AMY
RED O
OTHER PURPOSES OTHER TN THAT FOR WHICH IT IS SPECIFICALL Y FURN ISHED, EXCEPT BY
TO FIRE ALARM STAGE-1 (4UR N) -? (BY ELECT'L SEC1TON) 1 E1-NT R0OM VOID 360' 432 1/4 380.00 mm' 80-056- WRITTEN PERMISSION OF QATAR FACTORY.
DRAWING TITLE:
2500
2 E2-N1 TRENCH VOID 180' 415 32 75.03 mm' 80-061-
1160
FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION & DETECTION SYSTEM

_FECP SCHEMATIC LAYOUT (DESIGN DATA FOR MV ROOM @ ABA SALEEL
SCALE NTS SCALE NTS
DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED DATE
SCALE
JAF PPS ARM 16.05.2019 AS SHOWN
DWG.NO. SHEET REV: SIZE:
N_a_E-_F_M_2_00_-_A_s-_M_v_R_-
o_w_G_-0_0_1 -.o_A_1=--J I
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
13. COMMISSIONING DATA
69
FOR QRTRR
FACTORY
FM 200 SYSTEM
13.0 COMMISSIONING DATA
13.1 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT
NOTE:
The approved commissioning reports will be included once available or in the
final submission of the manual.
70

Operation Amp Maintenance Manual For fm200 System Rev 01 PDF Free

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Amp Maintenance Manual For fm200 System Rev 01 PDF Free

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation & Maintenance

Manual QATAR FACTORY

Doc. Ref. No.: QF-2020-QHSE-OMM-8705

REVIEW COMMENTS SHEET (RCS)

The Manuals used operationally or frequently for operator/user

Complied. Refer to section 8.1 & 8.2 for Control

Please note that volt free dry contacts

7 SERVICE HUBS AT MANATEQ

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section 1 V HOW TO USE THE MANUAL

5.1 FM 200 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Table 1.1 O&M Manual - Table of Contents 9

Figure 2.1 FM 200 Cylinder Assembly 16

1. HOW TO USE THE MANUAL

1.0 HOW TO USE THE MANUAL

Project. This Manual is divided into the following sections:

Table 1.1 O&M Manual - Table of Contents

1.1 OVERVIEW OF THE STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF THIS

A. This manual is consisted by independent section and this FM 200 System

B. These parts are described here below:

Section 1 -- How to Use the Manual

Section 2--System Description

Section 3- Equipment Schedule

Section 4- Safety and Environment

This section provides safety precautionary measure before performing any

Includes the basic maintenance aspects of the system and its

Section 8- Trouble Shooting

This section describes the fault finding procedures. It is organized in tabulated

Section 10-- Guarantee and Warranty

Section 11 -- Emergency Information

Section 12 -- Manufacturer's Literature

This section accommodates the manufacturers documentation organized in a

Section 13 -- Commissioning Data

2.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

FM 200 suppression system is a complete fire extinguishing system that utilizes

• Illuminates alarm lamp on the control panel.

Detection of fire by both zones simultaneously is considered as fire condition

• Illuminated pre-discharge LED on panel.

Provision to hold release of gas in pre-discharge stage is provided through an

To be effective, hazard protected should be made airtight before the discharge

Unnecessary exposure of personnel or either to the natural agent or to the products

2.2 STANDARD AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS

The complete systems are designed, furnished, erected and tested in

2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

2.3.1.1 Agent Storage Container

2.3.1.2 Container Nameplate

2.3.1.3 Valve Assembly

The valve assembly is factory-fitted to the container and is supplied pre•

Victaulic Coupling & Nipple

Pressure Gauge &

Figure 2.1 FM 200 Cylinder Assembly

2.3.1.4 Container Bracket

2.3.1.5 Disk Pack

A disc is factory fitted to every valve assembly. It is designed to rupture

Figure 2.4 Disk Pack

2.3.1.6 Impulse Valve Operator and Impulse Release Module

Impulse Valve Operator Impulse Release Module

Figure 2.5 IVO (Left) and IRM (Right)

FIke Control Maximum of 6 IR!Ms can be wired to

. ----;i, [--------------- ir-----------------i ,----- _L>

2.3.1.7 Low Pressure Switch and Liquid Level Indicator

A. A Low Pressure Supervisory Switch is fitted to every container and must be